republic of the philippines - dotr - homedotr.gov.ph/images/public_bidding/civilworks/air... ·...

PERTCONSULT INTERNATIONAL

SECTION VI – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VOLUME 3 OF 4

of the

BICOL INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT DEVELOPMENT PROJECT

PACKAGE 2A Construction of Landside Facilities

(Site Development and Other Buildings)

NOVEMBER 2014

SCHEMA Konsult, Inc. joint venture with:

PHILIPP’S TECHNICAL CONSULTANTS CORP. Design Engineers ●Master Planners● Construction. Manager

DCCD ENGINEERING CORPORATION

Republic of the Philippines

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION & COMMUNICATIONS The Columbia Tower Brgy. Wack-Wack, Ortigas Avenue, 1555 Mandaluyong City, Philippines

- 1 -

BICOL INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT DEVELOPMENT PROJECT Package 2A- Construction of Landside Facilities

(Site Development and Other Buildings)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION TITLE NO. OF PAGES

VOLUME 1 of 4: I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART A - FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER (INCLUDING ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE)

PART B - OTHER REQUIREMENTS

II. SITE DEVELOPMENT WORKS

• EARTHWORKS AND SECURITY FENCE/GATES

PART C – EARTHWORKS Item 100 Clearing and Grubbing ........................................................................................................ 2 Item 101 Removal of Structures and Obstructions ............................................................................ 1 Item 102 Excavation ........................................................................................................................... 2 Item 103 Structure Excavation ........................................................................................................... 3 Item 104 Embankment ....................................................................................................................... 4 Item 105 Subgrade Preparation ......................................................................................................... 2 Item 106 Compaction Equipment and Density Control Strips ............................................................ 2

PART F– BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION (for cross reference only)

Item 404 Reinforcing Steel ................................................................................................................. 3 Item 405 Structural Concrete ............................................................................................................. 8

PART H – MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES Item 604 Security Fence and Gates ................................................................................................... 6

• WATER SUPPLY WELLS

Section 1 Drilling, Construction and Testing of Test/Production Well ......................................... 18 Section 2 Submersible Deepwell Pump ........................................................................................ 4

- 2 -

VOLUME 2 of 4:

III. OTHER BUILDINGS

DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUCTION 02302 Excavation, Backfilling, and compacting for utilities ...................................................... 8 02360 Soil Treatment ............................................................................................................... 3

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 Cast in Place Concrete ..................................................................................................... 18 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04800 Reinforced Masonry ............................................................................................................ 7 DIVISION 5 - METAL 05120 Structural Steel .................................................................................................................... 5 05300 Steel Floor Decks ................................................................................................................ 4 05520 Handrails and Railings ........................................................................................................ 4 DIVISION 6 – WOODS AND PLASTICS 06400 Finish Carpentry .................................................................................................................. 3 DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE 07101 Dampproofing ...................................................................................................................... 2 07102 Elastomeric Waterproofing system, Fluid- applied .............................................................. 5 07210 Building Insulation ............................................................................................................... 2 07410 Preformed Metal Roofing .................................................................................................... 5 07412 Roof Insulation .................................................................................................................... 2 07460 Aluminum Composite Panel ................................................................................................ 2 07900 Sealants and Caulking ........................................................................................................ 6 DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames ..................................................................................................... 4 08210 Wood Doors ........................................................................................................................ 3 08256 Wired Glass Skylight ........................................................................................................... 2 08420 Aluminum Doors and Frames ............................................................................................. 3 08423 Automated Door Control System ........................................................................................ 2 08511 Metal Wall Louvers .............................................................................................................. 2 08520 Aluminum Windows ............................................................................................................ 4 08710 Finish Hardware .................................................................................................................. 5 08800 Glazing ................................................................................................................................ 3

- 3 -

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09601 Epoxy Coating ..................................................................................................................... 3 09602 Granite Tiles ........................................................................................................................ 2 09604 Ceramic Tile ........................................................................................................................ 4 09605 Vinyl Flooring ....................................................................................................................... 4 09606 Rubber Sheet Flooring and Stair Thread ............................................................................ 3 09609 Homogenous Tile ................................................................................................................ 4 09611 Carpet Tile ........................................................................................................................... 5 09613 Gravel Washout Finish ........................................................................................................ 3 09614 Floor Hardener .................................................................................................................... 2 09615 Access Flooring (Raised Floor) ........................................................................................... 7 09702 Vinyl Coated Wall Covering................................................................................................. 4 09703 Plastering ............................................................................................................................ 5 09704 Abuse Resistant Interior Veneer Plastering ........................................................................ 2 09705 Fiber Cement Board ............................................................................................................ 5 09800 Ceiling Suspension Systems ............................................................................................... 5 09801 Aluminum Spandrel Ceiling System .................................................................................... 2 09802 Acoustical Ceiling ................................................................................................................ 4 09803 Plasterboard ........................................................................................................................ 4 09806 Perforated Metal Ceilings .................................................................................................... 6 09807 Linear Metal Ceilings ........................................................................................................... 6 09910 Painting of Building (Field Painting) .................................................................................... 6 09918 Special Coatings Tank Lining –Food Grade ....................................................................... 3 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10165 Toilet Compartments ........................................................................................................... 2 10350 Flagpoles ............................................................................................................................. 2 10810 Toilet & Bath Accessories ................................................................................................... 3

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHING

12600 Furniture and Accessories .................................................................................................. 2 DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13100 Lighting Protection System .................................................................................................. 3 13700 Airport Security Systems ................................................................................................... 10 13920 Fire Pumps ........................................................................................................................ 12 13930 Fire Extinguishing Sprinkler Systems (Wet Pipe) ............................................................... 7 13940 FM-200 Gas System ........................................................................................................... 3

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEM

14210 Passenger Elevator ............................................................................................................. 3 14300 Escalators ........................................................................................................................... 9 14500 Baggage Handling Systems .............................................................................................. 10 14950 Passenger Boarding Bridges ............................................................................................ 14

- 4 -

VOLUME 3 of 4:

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL (PLUMBING)

15110 Valves .................................................................................................................................. 3 15140 Domestic Water Piping ....................................................................................................... 3 15150 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping ......................................................................................... 4 15152 Submersible Pumps ............................................................................................................ 3 15154 Submersible Booster Pumps............................................................................................. 10 15160 Storm Drainage Piping ........................................................................................................ 3 15440 Plumbing Fixtures ............................................................................................................... 3 DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL (HVAC)

15011 Mechanical General Requirements ................................................................................... 10 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods ........................................................................... 4 15200 Noise and Vibration Control ................................................................................................ 8 15250 Insulation of Mechanical Systems ....................................................................................... 9 15483 Fuel Oil Handling System .................................................................................................... 7 15652 Chilled Water Piping Systems ........................................................................................... 19 15653 Unitary Air Conditioning (Split-Type) Systems .................................................................... 8 15682 Air-Cooled Water Chillers.................................................................................................... 6 15856 Air Handling and Distribution Equipment............................................................................. 7 15871 Ventilation and Exhaust Systems (FANS& BLOWERS) ..................................................... 9 15895 Ductwork and Ductwork Accessories ................................................................................ 10 15896 Secondary Cables and Wires .............................................................................................. 4 15971 Space Temperature Control Systems ............................................................................... 15 15972 BMS Instrumentation ......................................................................................................... 14 15973 BMS Inspection and Acceptance Testing ......................................................................... 13 15980 Supply and Installation of Elevator ...................................................................................... 3 15996 Testing and Balancing Air and Water Systems ................................................................... 9

VOLUME 4 OF 4:

DIVISION 16 – Electrical

16011 Electrical General Requirements ..................................................................................... 10 16206 Power Generating Plants, Diesel Electric.......................................................................... 24 16262 Automatic Transfer Switches ............................................................................................ 10 16301 Underground Electric Work ................................................................................................. 7 16302 Overhead Electrical Work ................................................................................................... 9 16402 Interior Wiring Systems ..................................................................................................... 15 16462 Three-Phase Padmounted Transformer ............................................................................. 6 16463 Single Phase Padmounted Transformer ............................................................................. 3 16474 Medium Voltage Switchgear (Ring Main Unit)..................................................................... 6 16475 Low Voltage Switchgear ...................................................................................................... 7 16510 Interior Lighting .................................................................................................................... 3 16523A Constant Current Regulators & Regulators Monitors ........................................................ 10 16530 Exterior Lighting .................................................................................................................. 4 16711 Structured Cabling System.................................................................................................. 6 16722 Fire Alarm System ............................................................................................................... 9 16760 Public Address System ....................................................................................................... 5 16761 Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchange (EPABX) .................................................. 6 16762 Closed Circuit TV System ................................................................................................... 8 16762A Flight Information Display System ....................................................................................... 4

*****

Division 15 – Mechanical (Plumbing)

Bicol international Airport Development Project Division 15 – Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Valves

1 of 3

SCTION 15110 - VALVES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 Scope

This section covers gate valves, check valves, and angle valves.

Valves shall be furnished and installed complete with all fittings, jointing materials, hangers, supports, anchors, and other necessary appurtenances.

1.2 References

1.2.1 Governing Standards

Except as modified or supplemented herein, all materials required in this section including their installation shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following standards. Standards current at the time of tender shall be used.

a. ANSI American National Standard Institute b. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers c. AWWA American Water Works Association d. MSS Manufactures Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry

1.3 Coordination

Materials furnished under this section shall be the standard products of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same item of materials are required, they shall be the products of a single manufacturers.

1.4 Submittals

1.4.1 Drawings and Data

Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings covering the valves and accessories shall be submitted.

1.5 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

1.5.1 Storage and Handling

Valves shall be stored and handled in a manner, which will ensure installation in sound, undamaged condition. Handling methods and equipment used shall not damage pipe and fittings.

1.6 Quality Assurance

1.6.1 Tolerances

Unless otherwise specified, the actual length of valves shall be within 2 mm ( plus or minus) of the specified or theoretical length.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

a. Gate valves

(1) 65 mm and smaller MSS-SP-80

(2) 75 mm and larger AWWA C500

b. Check valves

1. 50 mm and smaller MSS-SP-80


2 of 3

2. 65 mm and larger AWWA C508

c. Angle valves MSS-SP-80

d. Unions ASME B16.39

2.2 Performance and Design Requirements

2.2.1 Gate Valves

Gate valves 65 mm and smaller shall be solid wedge type, rated 125 psig at a minimum temperature of 82°C. Valves shall be of bronze construction with screwed bonnet, rising stem, and teflon impregnated packing.

Gate valves 75 mm and larger shall be rated 125 psig at a minimum temperature of 28°C, double disc type. Gate valves installed in vertical piping shall be of solid wedge type. Gate valves installed inside structures shall be of rising stem type with stuffing box stem seals. Gate valves, which are buried or submerged, shall be nonrising stem types with O-ring stem seals.

2.2.2 Check Valves

Check valves, 65mm and larger, which are installed in water pump discharge piping having a working pressure of 125 psig or less shall be swing type designed for installation between two pipe flanges. Each check valve shall have a cast iron or bronze body.

Check valves 50mm and smaller in water piping shall be rated 125 psig at a minimum temperature of 28°C, all bronze, Y-pattern, regrinding, horizontal swing type.

2.2.3 Angle Valves

Angle valves 50mm and smaller for water service shall be rated 125 psig at a minimum temperature of 28°C and 862 kPa at 205°C with bronze body, seat, and disc; screwed bonnet; rising stem; teflon impregnated packing; and threaded ends.

2.3 Fabrication

2.3.1 Shop Painting

All ferrous metal surfaces of valves and accessories, both interior and exterior, shall be shop painted for corrosion protection.

Surfaces to be painted shall be as follows:

a. Exterior surfaces of all-rust-inhibitive primer

b. Polished or machined surfaces-rust-preventive compound.

c. Actuators and accessories-rust-inhibitive primer

2.3.2 Rotation

Unless otherwise required by the Owner’s Representative, the direction of rotation of the wheel, wrench nut, or lever to open the valve shall have cast thereon the word “OPEN”, and an arrow indicating the direction to open.

2.3.3 Unions

A union or flanged connection shall be provided within 600mm of each threaded end valve unless the valve can be easily removed from the piping.

2.4 Accessories

2.4.1 Valve Boxes

Valve boxes shall be cast iron, extension sleeve type, suitable for the depth of cover required by the drawings. Not more than one extension will be allowed with each slide type valve box.


3 of 3

Valve boxes shall have a minimum thickness at any point of 5mm, and shall be provided with suitable cast iron bases and covers.

All parts of valve box, bases, and covers shall be shop coated by dipping in asphalt varnish.

Top sections and covers for valve boxes, which are to be provided with position indicators, shall be designed for proper installation of the position indicator and accessories.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

3.1.1 Manufacturer’s Recommendations

Valves and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

3.1.2 Valve Boxes

Valves and valve boxes shall be set plumb. Each valve box shall be placed directly over the valve it serves, with the top of the box brought flush with the finished grade. After being place in proper position, earth shall be filled in around each valve box and thoroughly tamped on each side of the box.

3.2 Cleaning

The valves shall be smooth, clean, and free from blister, loose mill scale, sand, dirt, and other foreign matter when erected. The interior of all lines shall be thoroughly cleaned, to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative, before being placed in service.

3.3 Method of Measurement

Valves shall be measured by the number of units installed required as shown on the plans and details.

4.0 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

Valves shall be measured by the number of units installed required as shown on the plans and details.

5.0 BASIS OF PAYMENT

The quantities determined as provided in Method of Measurement shall be paid for at the contract unit price, respectively for each of the Pay Item listed below and shown on the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials including labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Section.

Payment will be made in accordance with the Bill of Quantities.

******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15- Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Domestic Water Piping

1 of 3

SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope

This section covers furnishing and installation of domestic water piping and piping accessories above floor within the building and below floor under the building to 1.5 meters outside the building below grade.

Domestic water piping shall be furnished and installed complete with all fittings, jointing materials, hangers, supports, anchors, and other necessary appurtenances.

1.2 References

1.2.1 Except as modified or supplemented herein, all materials required in this section including their installation shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following standards. Standards current at the time of tender shall be used.

1.3 Coordination

Pipe lengths and dimensions furnished shall be coordinated with the lengths for the valves, fittings, and other items to be installed in the piping. All fittings shall have the same diameter and shall be suitable for the pressure to which they will be subjected.

1.4 Submittals


Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings covering the domestic water piping and accessories shall be submitted.


1.5.1 Storage and Handling.

Pipe and fittings shall be stored and handled in a manner which will ensure installation in sound, undamaged condition. Handling methods and equipment used shall not damage pipe and fittings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

2.1.1 Pipes and Fittings

a) Cold Water Piping

(1) Cold Water Lines – for risers, downfeeds& distribution lines shall be Polypropylene (PP-R) Random (Type 3) pipe and fittings PN20, high resistance to pressure and temperature, conforming to DIN specifications DIN 8077 and DIN 8078 or ASTM F 2389, forming polyfusion homogeneous joint.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

3.1.1 Field Measurements

Pipe shall be cut from measurements taken at the site and not from the drawings.


2 of 3

3.2 Installation

3.2.1 Piping

Pipe shall be installed as specified, as indicated on the drawing or, in the absence of detail piping arrangement, in a manner acceptable to the Owner’s Representative.

The water supply piping at each fixture shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, whether indicated on the drawings or not, which will permit isolation and disconnection of each item without disturbing the remainder of the system.

A union shall be provided within 600 mm of each threaded end valve unless there are other connections which will permit easy removal of the valve. Unions shall also be provided in piping at locations adjacent to devices or equipment which may require removal in the future and at locations required by the drawings or specifications.

All necessary provisions shall be taken in laying out piping to provide throughout for expansion and contraction. Piping shall be held free of contact with building construction so as not to transmit noise resulting from expansion.

3.2.2 Polypropylene (PP-R) Random (Type 3) Pipe PP-R pipes and fittings must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation recommendation.

3.2.2 Pipe Joints

Polypropylene (PP-R) Random (Type 3) : The maximum permissible support for (PP-R) spacing shall be as follows:

3.2.4 Water Hammer Arrestors

Water hammer arrestors shall be provided in hot and cold water piping.

3.3 Field Quality Control

3.3.1 Pressure and Leakage Testing

Tests shall be made by and at the expense of the Contractor in the presence, and to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. Each piping system shall be tested for at least one hour with no loss of pressure. Piping shall be tested with water pressure of 100 psi (690 kPa).

Leakage may be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or other positive and accurate method in accordance with AWWA M11 and acceptable to the Owner’s Representative. All fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the specified test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as required during the testing procedures.

d (mm)

Distance between two brackets (cm) 20ºC 30ºC 40ºC 50ºC 60ºC 70ºC

20 25 32 40 50 63 75 90

110

75 85 100 110 130 150 170 180 190

75 85 100 110 125 145 165 175 185

70 85 95 105 115 140 160 170 175

65 80 90 100 110 125 150 165 170

60 75 85 95 105 120 145 160 165

50 65 80 90 100 110 120 130 140


3 of 3

All necessary testing equipment and materials, including tools, appliances and devices shall be furnished and all tests shall be made by and at the expense of the Contractor and at such time as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

All piping, fittings, joints which are damaged during tests and repairs shall be removed, replaced and retested by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.

3.4 Cleaning and Disinfection

3.4.1 Cleaning

The inside of all pipes, valves, and fittings shall be smooth, clean, and free from blisters, loose mill scale, sand, dirt, and other foreign matter when erected. The interior of all lines shall be thoroughly cleaned, to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative, before being placed in service.

3.4.2 Disinfection

All disinfection work shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C651 and the requirements of the Department of Transportation and Communications. The new pipelines shall be disinfected by either the continuous feed method or the slug method or the tablet method. The chlorinating agent consisting of hypochlorite solution shall be injected into the pipeline at the supply end of each new line or valve section.

During disinfection, all valves shall be operated to ensure that all appurtenances are disinfected. Valves shall be manipulated in such a manner that the strong hypochlorite solution in the line being chlorinated will not flow back into the supply line. Check valves shall be used if required.

Upon completion of chlorination but before sampling and bacteriological testing, all heavily chlorinated water shall be removed from the pipelines by flushing with potable water until the chlorine residual in the pipelines is not higher than generally prevailing in the remainder of the system.

Bacteriological testing of water in the pipelines shall be performed after final flushing. A standard plate count shall be made for each sample.

Should the bacteriological tests indicate the presence of coliform organisms at any sampling point, the pipeline shall be reflushed, resampled and retested. If check samples show the presence of coliform organisms, then the pipeline shall be rechlorinated until results acceptable to the Owner’s Representative are obtained.


PE pipe shall be measured by linear meter and PE pipe fittings shall be measured by the number of units installed required as shown on the plans and details.




******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15- Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping

1 of 4

SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope

This section covers furnishing and installation of sanitary waste and piping, above floor within the building and below floor under the building to 1.5 meters outside the building below grade. It also covers furnishing and installation of floor drains, cleanouts, oil interceptors, and grease interceptor within and under the building.

Sanitary waste and vent piping system shall be furnished and installed complete with all fittings, jointing materials, hangers, supports, anchors, and other necessary appurtenances.

1.2 References


1.2.1 American National Standard Institute (ANSI)

ANSI A112.21.1M Floor Drains

1.2.2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

ASME A112.36.2M Cleanouts

1.2.3 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM D2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.

ASTM D2729 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D2855 Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.

1.2.4 International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO)

IAPMO PS 8 Oil and Sand Interceptors

1.2.5 Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI)

G-101 Grease Traps

1.2.6. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE)

ASSE 1018 Performance Requirements for Trap Seal Primer Valves Water Supply Fed

1.3 Coordination

Pipe lengths and dimensions furnished shall be coordinated with the lengths for the fittings, and other items to be installed in the piping.

1.4 Submittals


Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings covering the sanitary waste and vent piping systems and accessories shall be submitted.


2 of 4




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

2.1.1 PVC Pipe, Schedule 40

a. Pipe ASTM D2729

b. Fittings ASTM D2729

c. Solvent Cement ASTM D2564

d. Primer ASTM F656

2.1.2 Floor Drain ANSI A112.21.1M.

2.1.3. Cleanout plug ASME A112.36.2M.

2.1.4. Interceptors

a. Oil IAPMO PS 8

b. Grease Interceptor PDI G-101


2.2.1 Service Requirements

a. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipes shall be used for sanitary waste and vent piping.

b. For Airport Facility

Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes and fittings shall be used below building floor and below grade to 1.5 meters outside building for sanitary waste and vent piping systems.

2.2.2 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping

Where cleanouts are required in finished floors or in partition walls, a nickel-bronze access cover and frame with securing screw shall be installed over the cleanout plug. A cleanout installed in connection with cast iron oil pipe above building floor and PVC pipe below building floor and grade shall consist of a long-sweep ¼ bend or one or two 1/8 bend extended to the place indicated. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have accessed covers and frames installed with the finished wall.

Sanitary waste piping which is required to be buried beneath floors or underground shall be PVC, as indicated on the drawing to a point not less than 1.50 metres beyond the outside face of the structure. All sanitary waste piping buried beneath floors shall be encased in concrete at least 150mm thick.

2.2.3 Floor Drain

Floor drains with trap primer connections shall be installed as indicated on the drawing. Types of floor drain shall be as follows:


3 of 4

Trap primer shall be designed to maintain trap seal and shall automatically supply water to the floor drains. Trap primer shall be designed in accordance with ASSE 1018.

a. Floor Drain

Floor drain shall be galvanized two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer and with polished bronze funnel or anti-splash rim where indicated on drawings.

b. Trench Drain

Cast iron body with medium duty grating. Trench drain shall be cast-in-place.

2.2.4 Cleanouts

Cleanout shall be gas and watertight, and shall be provided with quick and easy plug removal to allow ample space for cleansing tools.

Cover plate shall be chromium plated bronze flush type for cleanout on pipe concealed in partitions.

Plug shall be cast iron ferrule with countersunk, screw type; shall be same size as the pipe up to and including 100mm.

2.2.5 Oil Interceptor

Oil interceptor shall be pre-fabricated coated steel and equipped with a removable sediment bucket and perforated flow-diffusing baffle. Oil interceptor shall be provided with gastight cleanout covers which shall be readily accessible. Oil interceptor capacity shall be as indicated on the drawing.

2.2.6 Grease Interceptor

Grease interceptor shall be if, commercially available, steel with gray duco coating inside and outside and flow control fitting. Grease interceptor shall be sized in accordance with PDI-G101 Standard and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation



3.2 Installation

3.2.1 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping

Sanitary waste and vent piping shall be installed where required and shall, in general, conform to the locations indicated on the drawings. Horizontal soil and waste pipes, 75mm and smaller, shall have a grade of 6mm per 300mm, (1/4” per foot) but for drainage pipe 100mm and larger, the slope toward the drainage outlet shall be not less than 3mm per 300mm.

Bell-ups shall be installed with the top rim flush with the floor surface.

Packing box drainage from each pump shall be piped directly from the tapped outlet in the bearing support bracket to a bell-up.

All vents passing through roofs shall be located at least 250mm from the intersection of a cant with the roof deck, and shall be adequately flashed as indicated on the drawings.


4 of 4

3.2.2 Pipe Joints

Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the specific purpose intended.

PVC pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement elastomeric.

3.2.3 Floor Drains

Floor drain shall of types and sizes indicated on the drawings. Floor drains shall be carefully adjusted to the correct elevation for proper drainage. Except at floor drains having integral traps, each floor drain shall be provided with “P” trap and trap primer installed as closed to the drain as possible, where indicated on the drawings.


3.3.1 Testing

Sanitary waste and venting systems shall be tested by filling with water to the level of the highest vent stack. Openings shall be plugged as necessary. Each system shall hold the water for 30 minutes without any drop in the water level.

3.4 Cleaning

The inside of all pipe fittings shall be smooth, clean, and free from blisters, loose mill scale, sand, dirt, and other foreign matter when erected. The interior of all lines shall be thoroughly cleaned, to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative, before being placed in service.


PVC pipe shall be measured by the linear meter and PVC pipe fittings shall be measured by the number of units installed required as shown on the plans and details.




******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15- Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Submersible Sump Pumps

1 of 3

SECTION 15152 - SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Scope

This Section covers furnishing and installation of sump pumps at the Bicol International Airport.

The Sump pump shall be furnished and installed complete with all fittings, valves, electrodes and other necessary accessories.

1.2 References



ANSI S2.19 Mechanical Vibration- Balance Quality Requirements of Rigid Rotors, Part 1: Determination of Permissible Residual Unbalance.


ASTM A 27 Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application

ASTM A 36 Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM C 33 Specifications for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement



ASTM D2855 Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.

ASTM F656 Standard Specification for Primers for use in Solvent Cement Joints of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.

1.3 Coordination

All Equipment included in this section shall be furnished by or through a single manufacturer who shall be responsible for the design, coordination, and the satisfactory performance of all the components over the full operation range.

1.4 Submittals


Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings covering the submersible pump and accessories shall be submitted.


The pump will be inspected for damage or other distress when received at the project site. The pump and associated equipment shall be delivered, stored indoors as recommended by the pump manufacturer, protected from construction or weather hazards at the project site. The pump and equipment shall have adequate short-term storage in a covered, dry, and ventilated location prior to installation. The manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed for extended storage. Proper equipment for handling the pump shall be supplied and shall be considered as special tools if not completely standard.


2 of 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

2.1.1 Submersible Pump Parts Material

a. Shaft Seal Silicone Carbide

b. Motor Frame Die Cast Aluminum

c. Impeller Special Alloy Rubber

d. Discharge Bore Die Cast Aluminum


2.2.1 Service Requirements for Airport Facility

It is the responsibility of the contractor to supply a pump that will meet the performance and design requirements without undue modifications to the sump as shown on the drawings. Any such modifications shall be at no cost to the Owner and must be received prior approval. The pump shall be capable of discharging capacity at a total dynamic head listed below:

QUANTITY CAPACITY LPS (GPM)

TOTAL DYNAMIC HEAD,M. (FT.) REMARKS

1 1.0 (15) 7.62(25) DUTY

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

Furnish one set of all necessary tools/special tools required to completely assemble, disassemble, or maintain the pumps. Special tools refers to oversized or specially dimensioned tools, special attachment or fixtures, or any similar items.

3.2 Installation

3.2.1 Submersible Sump Pump

Each pump and engine shall be installed in accordance with the written instructions of the manufacturer and under the direct supervision of the manufacturer’s representative or installation engineer. The Contractor shall furnish a competent installation engineer who is knowledgeable and experienced with the installation and start-up procedures for submersible pumps and the associated equipment specified. Installation/erecting engineers provided by this section shall include those from Contractor’s suppliers. When so requested, the installation engineer shall be responsible for providing complete and correct direction during installation, initial starting, and subsequent operation of equipment until field tests are completed. The installation engineer shall initiate instructions for actions necessary for proper receipt, inspection, handling, uncarting, assembly, and testing equipment. The installation engineer shall also keep a record of measurements taken during erection and shall furnish one copy to the Contractor on request or on the completion of the installation of assembly or part. The erecting shall instruct the Contractor or others as designated in the operation and maintenance features of the pump units.


The pump shall be tested at the manufacturer’s shop to demonstrate that the proposed pump operates without instability and complies with specified performance. Instability is defined when any point in usable range of the head-capacity curve cannot be repeated within 3 percent. When this occurs, the test shall be rerun. Test Procedures, except as herein specified, shall be in accordance with applicable provisions of HI 2.6. The temperature of the water used for testing shall be approximately the same for all tests run and shall be recorded during test runs.


3 of 3


The submersible pump including accessories shall be measured by the number of set required as shown on the plan and detail installed and accepted.




******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15- Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Submersible Booster Pump

1 of 10

SECTION 15154 - SUBMERSIBLE BOOSTER PUMP

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 Scope

This Section covers furnishing and installation of booster pump at location indicated on the drawings.

The booster pump shall be furnished and installed complete with all fittings, valves, electrodes and other necessary accessories.

1.2 Coordination

All equipment included in this section shall be furnished by or through a single manufacturer who shall be responsible for the design, coordination, and the satisfactory performance of all the components over the full operation range.

1.3 Submittals


Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings covering the submersible pump and accessories shall be submitted.


The pump will be inspected for damage or other distress when received at the project site. The pump and associated equipment shall be delivered, stored indoors as recommended by the pump manufacturer, protected from construction or weather hazards at the project site. The pump and equipment shall have adequate short-term storage in a covered, dry, and ventilated location prior to installation. The manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed for extended storage. Proper equipment for handling the pump shall be supplied and shall be considered as special tools if not completely standard.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General

a. All equipment shall be supplied from reputable firms engaged in the manufacturer of each particular item. The entire assembly as installed shall be given a start-up and test run to prove that all the Specifications have been met before acceptance by the Owner. The test duration shall be 24 hours. Submittal of the Certificate of Test to the Owner shall be a condition of final payment.

b. The Specifications stated herein are basic guides only. Other items not so indicated but

which are obviously necessary for the proper operation of system as intended shall be supplied in accordance with accepted engineering standards.

c. The equipment shall be guaranteed for a period of at least one year of trouble free

operation. The supplier of equipment shall certify to the availability of spare parts locally and service in case of system breakdowns within a period of at least three years. Manuals of operation and maintenance and lists of spare parts shall be supplied together with the equipment. Submittal of Warranty Certificate shall be a condition for final payment.

d. The supplier shall submit at least two copies of pump performance curves showing,

among others, the pump rating and pump efficiency properly marked thereon.


2 of 10

e. Accessories to be supplied for each pump shall include one non-slam type check valve and two (2) gate valves, of size equal to the size of pump discharge and suction, rated 150 psi. Also, one pressure gauge for each set of pumps and pipe fittings necessary for complete installation shall be provided. The pressure gauge shall be 100 mm face diameter and shall be reading from 0 psi (or 0 kg/cm2) to 100 psi (or 7 kg/cm2).

f. Price quoted shall include cost of delivery of all quoted items to the jobsite. Pump and motor installation dimension drawings shall be submitted together with the quotation.

g. The brands, names and place of manufacture of pump, motor, valves, controls and all

accessories where applicable shall be indicated in the quotation. Also, a description of pump impellers being offered shall be included.

h. A metal nameplate indicating in indelible letters the correct Specifications of the pump

and motor shall be properly attached to the assembly at a location such that the information written thereon can be conveniently read by all concerned.

i. Separate price shall be quoted for installation work, preparation and submittal of as-

installed Drawings.

2.2 PUMPING EQUIPMENT

2.2.1 Variable Speed Booster System

a. Scope

Supply and installation of a pre-fabricated and tested variable speed packaged system to maintain constant water delivery pressure.

b. Pumps

The pumps shall be in-line vertical multi-stage centrifugal pumps with one external frequency converter. The unit shall be rated for a total system capacity of 300 GPM at a discharge head of 150 feet when supplied with a working suction head of 1 foot. Each pump shall be sized as indicated:

Triplex System

Pump P1 = 100 GPM (50% of Total System Flow)

Pump P2 = 100 GPM (50% of Total System Flow)

Pump P3 = 100 GPM (Stand-by Unit)

The head-capacity curve shall have a steady rise in head from maximum to minimum flow within the preferred operating region. The shut-off head shall be a minimum of 20% higher than the head at the best efficiency point. The pumps shall have the following features: (i) The pump impellers shall be secured directly to the pump shaft by means of

a splined shaft arrangement.

(ii) The suction/discharge base shall have ANSI Class 250 flange or internal pipe thread (NPT) connections as determined by the pump station manufacturer.

(iii) Pump Construction.

Suction/discharge base, pump head, motor stool Cast iron (Class 30)


3 of 10

Impellers, diffuser chambers, outer sleeve: 304 Stainless Steel Shaft: 316 or 431 Stainless Steel Impeller wear rings: 304 Stainless Steel Shaft journals and chamber bearings: Silicon Carbide O-rings: EPDM

Shaft couplings for motor flange sizes 184TC and smaller shall be made of cast iron or sintered steel. Shaft couplings for motor flange sizes larger than 184TC shall be made of ductile iron (ASTM 60-40-18).

(iv) The shaft seal shall be a balanced o-ring cartridge type with the following features:

Collar, Drivers, Spring: 316 Stainless Steel Shaft Sleeve, Gland Plate: 316 Stainless Steel Stationary Ring: Silicon Carbide Rotating Ring: Silicon Carbide O-rings: EPDM

The Silicon Carbide shall be imbedded with graphite.

(v) Shaft seal replacement shall be possible without removal of any pump components other than the coupling guard, shaft coupling and motor. The entire cartridge shaft seal shall be removable as a one piece component. Pumps with motors equal to or larger than 15 hp (fifteen horsepower) shall have adequate space within the motor stool so that shaft seal replacement is possible without motor removal.

c. Variable Frequency Drive

(i) The VFD shall convert incoming fixed frequency single-phase or three-phase AC power into a variable frequency and voltage for controlling the speed of three-phase AC induction motors. The VFD shall be a six-pulse input design, and the input voltage rectifier shall employ a full wave diode bridge; VFD’s utilizing controlled SCR rectifiers shall not be acceptable. The output waveform shall closely approximate a sine wave. The VFD shall be of a PWM output design utilizing current IGBT inverter technology and voltage vector control of the output PWM waveform.

(ii) The VFD shall include a full-wave diode bridge rectifier and maintain a

displacement power factor of near unity regardless of speed and load.

(iii) The VFD shall produce an output waveform capable of handling maximum motor cable distances of up to 1,000 ft. (unshielded) without tripping or derating.

(iv) The VFD shall utilize an output voltage-vector switching algorithm, or

equivalent, in both variable and constant torque modes. VFD’s that utilize Sine-Coded PWM or Look-up tables shall not be acceptable.

(v) VFD shall automatically boost power factor at lower speeds.

(vi) The VFD shall be able to provide its full rated output current continuously at

110% of rated current for 60 seconds.


4 of 10

(vii) An empty pipe fill mode shall be available to fill an empty pipe in a short period of time, and then revert to the PID controller for stable operation.

(viii) Switching of the input power to the VFD shall be possible without interlocks

or damage to the VFD at a minimum interval of 2 minutes.

(ix) Switching of power on the output side between the VFD and the motor shall be possible with no limitation or damage to the VFD and shall require no additional interlocks.

(x) The VFD shall have temperature controlled cooling fans for quiet operation,

minimized internal losses, and greatly increased fan life.

(xi) VFD shall provide full torque to the motor given input voltage fluctuations of up to +10% to -15% of the rated input voltage.

(xii) The VFD shall provide internal DC link reactors to minimize power line

harmonics and to provide near unity power factor. VFD’s without a DC link reactor shall provide a 5% impedance line side reactor.

(xiii) VFD to be provided with the following protective features:

VFD shall have input surge protection utilizing MOV’s, spark gaps,

and Zener diodes to withstand surges of 2.3 times line voltage for 1.3 msec.

VFD shall include circuitry to detect phase imbalance and phase loss

on the input side of the VFD.

VFD shall include current sensors on all three-output phases to detect and report phase loss to the motor. The VFD will identify which of the output phases is low or lost.

VFD shall auto-derate the output voltage and frequency to the motor

in the presence of sustained ambient temperatures higher than the normal operating range, so as not to trip on an inverter temperature fault. The use of this feature shall be user-selectable and a warning will be exported during the event. Function shall reduce switching frequency before reducing motor speed.

VFD shall auto-derate the output frequency by limiting the output

current before allowing the VFD to trip on overload. Speed can be reduced, but not stopped.

The VFD shall have the option of an integral RFI filter. VFD

enclosures shall be made of metal to minimize RFI and provide immunity.

(xiv) VFD to be provided with the following interface features:

VFD shall provide an alphanumeric backlit display keypad, which

may be remotely mounted using standard 9-pin cable. VFD may be operated with keypad disconnected or removed entirely. Keypad may be disconnected during normal operation without the need to stop the motor or disconnect power to the VFD.

VFD shall display all faults in plain text; VFD’s, which can display only fault codes, are not acceptable.


5 of 10

All VFD’s shall be of the same series, and shall utilize a common control card and LCP (keypad/display unit) throughout the rating range. The control cards and keypads shall be interchangeable through the entire range of drives used on the project.

VFD keypad shall be capable of storing drive parameter values in

non-volatile RAM uploaded to it from the VFD, and shall be capable of downloading stored values to the VFD to facilitate programming of multiple drives in similar applications, or as a means of backing up the programmed parameters.

A red FAULT light, a yellow WARNING light and a green POWER-

ON light shall be provided. These indications shall be visible both on the keypad and on the VFD when the keypad is removed.

A start guide menu with factory preset typical parameters shall be

provided on the VFD to facilitate commissioning.

VFD shall provide full galvanic isolation with suitable potential separation from the power sources (control, signal, and power circuitry within the drive) to ensure compliance with PELV requirements and to protect PLC’s and other connected equipment from power surges and spikes.

All inputs and outputs shall be optically isolated. Isolation boards

between the VFD and external control devices shall not be required.

There shall be three programmable digital inputs for interfacing with the systems external control and safety interlock circuitry. An additional digital input is preprogrammed for start/stop.

The VFD shall have two analog signal inputs. One dedicated for sensor input and one for external set point input.

One programmable analog output shall be provided for indication of a drive status.

The VFD shall provide two user programmable relays with selectable

functions. Two form ‘C’ 230VAC/2A rated dry contact relay outputs shall be provided.

The VFD shall store in memory the last 5 faults with time stamp and

recorded data.

The VFD shall be equipped with a standard RS-485 serial communications port for communication to the multi-pump controller. The bus communication protocol for the VFD shall be the same as the controller protocol.

(xv) VFD service conditions:

Ambient temperature operating range, -10 to 45ºC (14 to 113F).

0 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing.

Elevation to 1000 meters (3,300 feet) without derating.


6 of 10

VFD’s shall be rated for line voltage of 380 to 480VAC; with +10% to -15% variations. Line frequency variation of ± 2% shall be acceptable.

No side clearance shall be required for cooling of the units.

d. Fixed Speed Motors

(i) Fixed Speed Motors are to be provided with the following basic features: (ii) Designed for continuous duty operation, NEMA design B with a 1.15 service

factor. (iii) Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled or Open Drip Proof with Class F insulation. (iv) Nameplate shall have, as a minimum, all information as described in NEMA

Standard MG 1-20.40.1. (v) Motors shall have a NEMA C-Flange for vertical mounting. 5. Drive end bearings shall be adequately sized so that the minimum L10 bearing

life is 17,500 hours at the minimum allowable continuous flow rate for the pump.

e. Pump System Controller

(i) The pump system controller shall be a standard product developed and supported by the pump manufacturer.

(ii) The controller shall be microprocessor based capable of having software changes and updates via personal computer (notebook). The controller user interface shall have a VGA display with a minimum screen size of 3-1/2” x 4-5/8” for easy viewing of system status parameters and for field programming. The display shall have a back light with contrast adjustment. Password protection of system settings shall be standard.

(iii) The controller shall provide internal galvanic isolation to all digital and analog inputs as well as all fieldbus connections.

(iv) The controller shall display the following as status readings from a single display on the controller (this display shall be the default): Current value of the control parameter, (typically discharge pressure) Most recent existing alarm (if any) System status with current operating mode Status of each pump with current operating mode and rotational

speed as a percentage (%)

(v) The controller shall have as a minimum the following hardware inputs and outputs:

Three analog inputs (4-20mA or 0-10VDC) Three digital inputs Two digital outputs Ethernet connection Field Service connection to PC for advanced programming and data

logging


7 of 10

(vi) Pump system programming (field adjustable) shall include as a minimum the following:

Water shortage protection (analog or digital) Transducer Settings (Suction and Discharge Analog supply/range) PI Controller (Proportional gain and Integral time) settings High system pressure indication and shut-down Low system pressure indication and shut-down Low suction pressure/level shutdown (via digital contact) Low suction pressure/level warning (via analog signal) Low suction pressure/level shutdown (via analog signal) Flow meter settings (if used, analog signal)

(vii) The system controller shall be able to accept up to seven programmable set-points via a digital input, (additional input/output module may be required).

(viii) The controller shall have advanced water shortage protection. When analog sensors (level or pressure) are used for water shortage protection, there shall be two indication levels. One level is for warning indication only (indication that the water level/pressure is getting lower than expected levels) and the other level is for complete system shut-down (water or level is so low that pump damage can occur). System restart after shut-down shall be manual or automatic (user selectable).

(ix) The system pressure set-point shall be capable of being automatically adjusted by using an external set-point influence. The set-point influence function enables the user to adjust the control parameter (typically pressure) by measuring an additional parameter. (Example: Lower the system pressure set-point based on a flow measurement to compensate for lower friction losses at lower flow rates).

(x) The controller shall be capable of receiving a remote analog set-point (4-20mA or 0-10 VDC) as well as a remote system on/off (digital) signal.

(xi) The pump system controller shall store up to 24 warning and alarms in memory. The time, date and duration of each alarm shall be recorded. A potential-free relay shall be provided for alarm notification to the building management system. The controller shall display the following alarm conditions:

High System Pressure Low system pressure

Low suction pressure (warning and/or alarm) Individual pump failure

VFD trip/failure Loss of sensor signal (4-20 mA)

Loss of remote set-point signal (4-20mA) System power loss

(xii) The pump system controller shall be mounted in a UL Type 3R rated enclosure. A self-certified NEMA enclosure rating shall not be considered equal. The entire control panel shall be UL 508 listed as an assembly. The control panel shall include a main disconnect, circuit breakers for each pump and the control circuit and control relays for alarm functions.


8 of 10

Control panel options shall include, but not be limited to:

Pump Run Lights Pump Alarm Lights

System Fault Light Audible Alarm (80 db[A])

Surge Arrestor Control Panel Internal Illumination

Emergency/Normal Operation Switches Service Disconnect Switches

(xiii) The controller shall be capable of receiving a redundant sensor input to function as a backup to the primary sensor (typically discharge pressure).

(xiv) The controller shall have a pump “Test Run” feature such that pumps are switched on during periods of inactivity (system is switched to the “off” position but with electricity supply still connected). The inoperative pumps shall be switched on for a period of two to three (2-3) seconds every 24 hours, 48 hours or once per week (user selectable).

(xv) The actual pump performance curves (5th order polynomial) shall be loaded (software) into the pump system controller.

f. Hydropneumatic Presure Tank

A 350 gallon nominal (or as recommended by pump manufacturer) bladder- type (“bag type”) carbon steel hydropneumatic pressure tank, designed to ASME Code and stamped 200 psi working pressure shall be furnished mounted and piped at the factory. The bladder shall be made of heavy duty butyl rubber and FDA approved for potable water applications.

g. Sequence of Operation

The system controller shall operate from two to six equal capacity pumps and one Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) to maintain a constant discharge pressure (system set-point). The system controller shall receive an analog signal [4-20mA] from the factory installed pressure transducer on the discharge manifold, indicating the actual system pressure. When a flow demand is detected (drop in system pressure) the VFD controlled pump shall start first. As flow demand increases, the speed of the VFD controlled pump shall be increased to maintain the system set-point pressure. When the VFD controlled pump cannot maintain the system set-point as flow increases (pressure starts to drop below system set-point), an additional pump will be started Direct-On-Line (DOL). The VFD controlled pump shall immediately adjust speed to maintain the system set-point. Additional DOL pumps shall be started as flow demand increases. As flow demand decreases, the pump speed shall be reduced while system set-point pressure is maintained. The system controller shall switch off DOL operated pumps as required with decreasing flow.

The system controller shall be capable of switching pumps on and off to satisfy system demand without the use of flow switches, motor current monitors or temperature measuring devices.

h. Low Flow Stop Function

The system controller shall be capable of stopping pumps during periods of low-flow or zero-flow without wasting water or adding unwanted heat to the liquid. Temperature based no flow shut-down methods that have the potential to waste water and add unwanted temperature rise to the pumping fluid are not acceptable.


9 of 10

Standard Low Flow Stop and Energy Saving Mode

If a low or no flow shut-down is required (periods of low or zero demand) a bladder type diaphragm tank shall be installed with a pre-charge pressure of 70% of system set-point. The tank shall be piped to the discharge manifold or system piping downstream of the pump system. When only one pump is in operation the system controller shall be capable of detecting low flow (less than 10% of pump nominal flow) without the use of additional flow sensing devices. When a low flow is detected, the system controller shall increase pump speed until the discharge pressure reaches the stop pressure (system set-point plus 50% of programmed on/off band). The pump shall remain off until the discharge pressure reaches the start pressure (system set-point minus 50% of programmed on/off band). Upon low flow shut-down a pump shall be restarted in one of the following two ways:

(i) Low Flow Restart: If the drop in pressure is slow when the start pressure is reached (indicating the flow is still low), the pump shall start and the speed shall again be increased until the stop pressure is reached and the pump shall again be switched off.

(ii) Normal Flow Restart: If the drop in pressure is fast (indicating the flow is greater than 10% of pump nominal flow) the pump shall start and the speed shall be increased until the system pressure reaches the system set-point.

It shall be possible to change from the standard low flow stop to the optional low flow stop (and vice-versa) via the user interface.

i. System Construction

(i) The suction and discharge manifolds shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. Manifold connection sizes shall be as follows:

3 inch and smaller: Male NPT threaded

4 inch through 8 inch: ANSI Class 150 rotating flanges

10 inch and larger: ANSI Class 150 flanges

(ii) Pump Isolation valves shall be provided on the suction and discharge of each pump. Isolation valve sizes 2 inch and smaller shall be nickel plated brass full port ball valves. Isolation valve sizes 3 inch and larger shall be a full lug style butterfly valve. The valve disk shall be of stainless steel. The valve seat material shall be EPDM and the body shall be cast iron, coated internally and externally with fusion-bonded epoxy.

(iii) A spring-loaded non-slam type check valve shall be installed on the discharge of each pump. The valve shall be a wafer style type fitted between two flanges. The head loss through the valve shall not exceed 5 psi at the pump design capacity. Check valves 1-1/2” and smaller shall have a POM composite body and poppet, a stainless steel spring with EPDM or NBR seats. Check valves 2” and larger shall have a body material of stainless steel or epoxy coated iron (fusion bonded) with an EPDM or NBR resilient seat. Spring material shall be stainless steel. Disk shall be of stainless steel or leadless bronze.


10 of 10

(iv) For systems that require a diaphragm tank, a minimum diaphragm tank connection size of ¾” shall be provided on the discharge manifold.

(v) A pressure transducer shall be factory installed on the discharge manifold (or

field installed as specified on plans). Systems with positive inlet gauge pressure shall have a factory installed pressure transducer on the suction manifold for water shortage protection. Pressure transducers shall be made of 316 stainless steel. Transducer accuracy shall be +/- 1.0% full scale with hysteresis and repeatability of no greater than 0.1% full scale. The output signal shall be 4-20 mA with a supply voltage range of 9-32 VDC.

(vi) A bourdon tube pressure gauge, 2.5 inch diameter, shall be placed on the suction and discharge manifolds. The gauge shall be liquid filled and have copper alloy internal parts in a stainless steel case. Gauge accuracy shall be 2/1/2 %. The gauge shall be capable of a pressure of 30% above it’s maximum span without requiring recalibration.

(vii) Systems with a flooded suction inlet or suction lift configuration shall have a factory installed water shortage protection device on the suction manifold.

(viii) The base frame shall be constructed of corrosion resistant 304 stainless steel. Rubber vibration dampers shall be fitted between each pump and baseframe to minimize vibration.

(ix) Depending on the system size and configuration, the control panel shall be mounted in one of the following ways:

On a 304 stainless steel fabricated control cabinet stand attached to the system skid

On a 304 stainless steel fabricated skid, separate from the main system skid

On it’s own base (floor mounted with plinth)

j. Testing

(i) The entire pump station shall be factory performance tested as a complete unit prior to shipment. Job-site programming shall be entered into the controller prior to shipment (details of installation requirements shall be communicated to the pump system manufacturer). A verified performance test report shall be made available from the system manufacturer.

(ii) The system shall undergo a hydrostatic test of 350 psig for a minimum of 15

minutes prior to shipment.

k. Warranty

(i) The warranty period shall be a non-prorated period of 24 months from date of installation, not to exceed 30 months from date of manufacture.

******

Bicol international Airport Development Project Division 15 – Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Storm Drainage Piping

1 of 3

SECTION 15160 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope

This section covers furnishing and installation of storm drainage piping above floor within the building and below floor under the building to 1.5 m (5’-0”) outside the building below grade.

Storm drainage piping and roof drains shall be furnished and installed complete with all fittings, jointing materials, hangers, supports, anchors, and other necessary appurtenances.

1.2 References



ANSI A112.21.2M Roof Drains

ANSI A112.36.2M Cleanouts


ASTM C14 Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, StormDrain and Culvert Pipe

ASTM C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C76 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain and Culvert Pipe

ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement



ASTM D2855 Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.

ASTM F656 Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Polyvinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.

1.3 Coordination

Pipe lengths and dimensions furnished shall be coordinated with the lengths for the fittings, and other items to be installed in the piping.

1.4 Submittals


Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings covering the storm drainage piping and accessories shall be submitted.





2 of 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

2.1.1 PVC pipe

a. Pipe ASTM D2729

b. Fittings ASTM D2729

c. Solvent Cement ASTM D2564

d. Primer ASTM F656

2.1.2 Concrete Drain Pipe ASTM C14

2.1.3 Reinforced Concrete Drain Pipe ASTM C76

2.1.4 Roof Drain ANSI A112.21.2M

2.1.5 Cleanout ANSI A112.36.2M


2.2.1 Service Requirements for Airport Facility

a. Interior Drainage

Storm drainage piping and fittings shall be unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC), series 1000 for downspouts and drainage lines inside the building. These shall be used below building floor and below grade to 5’-0” outside the building. The pipe and fittings shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes (except for perforations as specified), foreign inclusions, or other injurious defects. The pipe shall be as uniform as uniform as commercially practicable in color, opacity, density, and other physical properties.

b. Exterior Drainage (non-traffic type)

Design requirements shall be in accordance with ASTM C14. Wall thickness used may be more than but not less than the value prescribed by ASTM C14, except as affected by the tolerance herein specified and by the provision for modified design. Manufacturers may submit to the Owner of approval, prior to manufacture, wall thickness other than those required by the aforementioned standard.

c. Exterior Drainage (traffic type)

Compressive strength of the concrete, and the area of the circumferential reinforcement shall be as prescribed for Classes I to V in accordance with ASTM C76. If permitted by the Owner, the manufacturer may request approval by the Owner of modified designs that differ from the designs as indicated in ASTM C76. Such modified or special designs shall be based on rational or empirical evaluations of the ultimate strength and cracking behavior of the pipe and shall fully describe to the Owner any deviations from the requirements of ASTM C76. The manufacturer shall submit to the owner proof of the adequacy of the proposed modified or special design.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation



3.2 Installation

3.2.1 PVC pipe Joints

Pipe joints shall be carefully and neatly made in accordance with the requirements as follows:


3 of 3

Solvent Welded.

All joint preparation, cutting, and jointing operations shall comply with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendation and ASTM D2855. Pipe ends shall be bevelled or assembled joints. Shall be suitably blocked or restrained to prevent movement during the set time recommended by the manufacturer.

3.2.2 Concrete Pipe Joints

The joints shall be such design and the ends of the concrete pipe sections so formed, that when the sections are laid together they will make a continuous line of pipe with a smooth interior free from appreciable irregularities in the flow line, all compatible with the permissible variations as prescribed in ASTM C76, section 13.

3.2.3 Roof Drains

Roof drains shall be of the types and sizes indicated on the drawings and shall have threaded or spigot outlets depending on the type of conductor pipes used. Roof drains in precast concrete shall be equipped with suitable deck clamps. Roof drains shall be securely and rigidly attached to the roof decks to prevent movement and shall be set at proper level for flashing and drainage.

3.2.4 Cleanouts

ANSI A112.36.2M; provide threaded bronze or thermoplastic or PVC plastic cleanout plugs.


Testing Storm drainage piping shall be tested by filling with water at the highest level. Openings shall be plugged as necessary. Piping shall hold the water for 30 minutes without any drop in the water level.

3.4 Cleaning

The inside of all pipes and fittings shall be smooth, clean, and free from blisters, loose mill scale, sand, dirt, and other foreign matter when erected. The interior of all lines shall be thoroughly cleaned, to the satisfaction of the Owner’s representative, before being placed in service.


PVC pipe shall be measured by the linear meter, PVC pipe fittings, roof strainer, junction box, trench drain, area drain and ceiling outlet shall be measured by the number of units installed required as shown on the plan and detail.




******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 – Mechanical

Section VI- Technical Specifications Plumbing Fixtures

1 of 3

SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

This specification covers the furnishing of materials and labor necessary to complete the installation of all toilet and bath fixtures as shown on drawings and as specified herein.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

1.2.1 Manufacturer's Catalog Data

Submit for each type of fixture specified. Include descriptions of materials, finishes, fastenings and anchoring devices, and appurtenances.

1.2.2 Samples

Submit one of each type of accessory complete with appurtenances and finished as specified. Approved samples may be installed in the work provided each sample labeled for identification and location recorded.

1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Deliver materials to the site in unopened containers, labeled with the manufacturer's names and brands, ready for installation. Store accessories in safe, dry locations until needed for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

This specifications covers all plumbing fixtures made from a mixture of white burning clays and finely ground minerals, the wares are subjected to a high temperature rendering them incapable of adsorbing liquid, when unglazed, does not have a mean value of water absorption greater than a 5% of the dry weight making it sanitary and odorless. It is than coated on all exposed surfaces with an impervious non-crazing vitreous glaze giving it a permanent colored finish and retains high quality gloss resistant to acids and alkaus making it easy to maintain.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

2.2.1 Water Closets

Water Closets shall be elongated 4.8 LPF top-inlet flush valve type water closet with seat and cover and floor flange.

2.2.2 Urinals

Urinals shall be wall-hung urinal supplied with spreader. 2.2.3 Lavatory

Lavatory shall be under the counter wash basin.



2 of 3

2.2.4 Water Closet Flush Valve

6 LPF flush valve fitting for water closet with Ø 1 ¼” vacuum breaker with brass spud.

2.2.5 Urinal Flush Valve

3.8 LPF flush valve fitting for urinal with Ø 3/4” vacuum breaker with bushing reducer.

2.2.6 Floor drain - 100mm x 100mm stainless steel. 2.2.7 Pantry Sink - 500mm x 400mm x 100mm stainless steel.. 2.2.8 Faucet

Faucet shall be single-lever basin mixer supplied with complete fittings..

2.2.9 Toilet Paper Holder

Toilet paper holder with cover shall be stainless steel.

2.2.10 Soap Dispenser

Liquid soap dispenser shall be stainless steel vertical type wall mounted.

2.2.11 Hand Dryer

Auto hand dryer (AC220V/60Hz).

2.2.12 Grab Bar

L-type anti-bacterial ABS grab bar (600x600mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Surfaces of fastening devices exposed after installation shall have the same finish as the attached fixtures. Exposed screw heads shall be oval. Install fixtures at the location and height as shown in the drawings. Protect exposed surfaces of accessories with strippable plastic or by other means until the installation is accepted. Coordinate fixture manufacturer's mounting details with other trades as their work progress. After installation, thoroughly clean exposed surfaces and restore damaged work to its original condition or replace with new work.

3.1.2 Surface Mounted Accessories

Mounting on concealed back-plates shall have concealed fasteners. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, install fixtures with sheet metal screws or wood screws in lead-lined braided jute, teflon or neoprene sleeves, or lead expansion shield, or other approved fasteners as required by the construction. Install back-plates in the same manner, or provide with lugs or anchors set in mortar, as required by the construction.



3 of 3


The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of plumbing fixtures, whichever is called for in the contract, installed, complete and accepted.


The quantities determined as provided in Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price, respectively for each of the Pay Items listed below and shown in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Section.


******

Division 15 – Mechanical (HVAC)

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 – Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Mechanical General Requirements

1 of 10

SECTION 15011 - MECHANICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 APPLICATION This section applies to all sections of Division 15, "Mechanical" of this project. 1.2 SUBMITTALS

Submit shop drawings, manufacturers data and certificates for equipment and materials where specified in each individual section, and obtained approval before procurement, fabrication, or delivery of the items to the job site. Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name, catalog model or number, nameplate data, size, layout dimensions capacity, project specification and paragraph reference, applicable industry, and technical society publication necessary to establish contract compliance of each item the Contractor proposes to furnish.

1.2.1 Shop Drawings

Drawings shall be a minimum of 350 mm by 500 mm in size, with a minimum scale of 1:100 meters, except as views, wiring diagrams, and installation details of equipment; and equipment spaces identifying and indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement of items of equipment, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to assure a coordinated installation. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.

1.2.2 As-Built (Record) Working Drawings

After completion, but before final acceptance of the work, furnish a complete set of working drawings of each system for record purposes. Drawings shall not be smaller than 762 mm x 1067 mm (30 inches x 40 inches) reproducible drawings with title block similar to full size contract drawings.

1.2.3 Manufacturer’s Data

Submittals for each manufactured item shall be manufacturer's descriptive literature of cataloged products, equipment drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, and catalog cuts.

1.2.4 Standards Compliance

When materials or equipment must conform to the standards of organizations such as the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), NFPA, American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), American Refrigeration Institute (ARI), and Underwriters Laboratories (UL), proof of such conformance shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. If an organization uses a label or listing to indicate compliance with a particular standard, the label or listing will be acceptable evidence.


2 of 10

1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Furnish an operation and maintenance manual for each item of equipment. Furnish three copies of the manual bound in hardback binders or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual prior to the time that equipment tests are performed, and furnish the remaining manuals before the contract is completed. Inscribe the following identification on the cover; the words operation and maintenance manual, the name and location of the building and the name of the Contractor. The manual shall include the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing equipment and of the local representatives for each item of equipment. The manual shall have a table of contents and be assembled to conform to the table of contents with the tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The manual shall include: wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control for each item of equipment; a control sequence describing star-up, operation and shut-down; description of the function of each principal item of equipment; the procedure for starting; the procedure for operating shut-down instructions; installation instructions; maintenance instructions; lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range, and frequency; safety precautions, diagrams, and illustrations; test procedures; performance data; and parts list. The parts lists for equipment shall indicate the sources of supply, recommended spare parts and the service organization which is reasonably convenient to the project site. The manual shall be complete in all respects for equipment, controls, accessories, and associated appurtenances provided.

1.4 Proposed Separation of Work between the Trades

A. The specifications describe in detail the proposed work included for each trade when the main Contractor divides the work among their Contractors. The following summary is an outline of the work to be “Provided”, “Furnished” or “Installed” by each of the trades included in the contract, i.e., Plumbing & Sprinkler, (Div.15) HVAC, Building Management System (Div. 15), Electrical (Div. 16) and other Divisions 1-14.

B. In the absence of more detailed information, consider the list as specific instructions to include such work in the named contract.

C. Abbreviations are as follows: 1. “OD” - Other Division of the Contract (not Electrical or Mechanical) 2. “Plb” - Plumbing – Division 15 3. “Spr” - Sprinkler – Division 15 4. Mech” - Mechanical – Division 15 5. “Elec” - Electrical – Division 16 6. “BMS” - Building Management System – Division 15 7. “F” - Furnished 8. “I” - Installed 9. “P” - Provided (Furnished and Installed)


3 of 10

ITEM OD Plb Spr. Mech. Elec. BMS Remarks Motors for Mechl., Plumbing, Fire Protection Equip’t.

- P P P - -

Cables to be determined in the Motor Controls by each trade.

Feeder Cables from Electrical Panels to Motor Controls

- - - - P -

Specification and drawings delineate detailed exceptions.

Wiring for Mechl., Plumbing, Fire Protection Equip’t Motors including the feeder cables from motor controller

- P P P - -

Wiring for Mech’l Equipment Motor Controls and Alarms

- P P P - P

Specifications and drawings delineate in detail the work to be performed by each trade.

BMS Control Field Devices - P P P P -

DDC Field Controllers - - - - - P

Wiring Terminations - P P P P P

Contractor Who Supplied the Panel will do the termination.

Temporary Light and Power

- - - - - - As per contract Documents.

Temporary Water - - - - - -

As per Contract Documents.

Toilets - - - - - - As per Contract Documents

Temporary Fire Protection

- - - - - - As per Contract Documents.


4 of 10

ITEM OD Plb Spr. Mech. Elec. BMS Remarks

Hoisting P P P P P P

Rigging P P P P P P Bracing of building for Safe Rigging

P - - - - -

Cutting, Chasing & Patching

P - - - - -

Cost where due to late installation or improper coordination of work is the responsibility of the delinquent trade.

Framed Slots and Openings in Walls, Decks and Slabs

P - - - - -

Includes drilling of holes when required.Cost where due to late installation or improper coordination of work is the responsibility of the delinquent trade.

Sleeves P - - - - - Waterproofing Sealing of Sleeves through Waterproof Slabs, Decks and Walls

P P P P P

Fireproof Sealing of Excess Openings in Slabs, Decks and Fire Rated Walls

P P P P P

Excavation and Backfill Inside Buildings

P P P P P

Excavation and Backfill Outside Buildings

P - - - - -

Coordination with the trades. Cost where due to late installation or improper coordination of work is the responsibility of the delinquent trade.


5 of 10

ITEM OD Plb Spr. Mech. Elec. BMS Remarks Keep Site and Excavation Free From Surface Water During Construction

P - - - - -

Fastenings - P P P P P

Supports P P P P P P

Concrete Encasement of Electrical Conduits

- - - - P -

Below Grade Drainage Inside Building

- P - - - -

Base Flashing of Electric Conduits Through Roof (Pitch Pockets)

P - - - - - Cap flashing by Trade.

Electrical Handholes, and Covers

- - - - P -

Finish Painting ( does not include I.D. marks or color coding specified and provided by each trade

P P P P P P

Finished Walls and Ceiling Access Doors, Panels and Supporting Frames

P -- - - - -

Supplying list of location of all times requiring access doors included in the Division requiring same.


6 of 10


Plaster Rings and Frames I F - - F -

Plaster rings and frame furnished in electric only for lighting fittings which are so equipped.

Rubbish Removal P P P P P P

Where one trade furnishes and another installs, the installing trade removes the shipping and packing materials which accumulate.

Special Tools for Equipment Maintenance

F F F F F F

Electric Power Consuming Items and Controls for Other than Mechanical Equipment, e.g. Motorized Doors

P - - - - -

Furnishing exact dimensions of anchors, vibration mounts and templates included in each trade providing the associated equipment.

Concrete Foundations, Pads, Pits, Curbs, and Bases Inside Buildings

P - - - - -

Furnishing exact dimensions of anchors, vibration mounts and templates included in each trade providing the associated equipment.

Concrete Foundations Pads and Bases Outside Buildings

P - - - - -

Furnishing of covers and associated frames included in each trade.


7 of 10


Sump Pits P - - - - -

Furnishing of covers and associated frames included in each trade.

Concrete Lined Trenches inside Building Foundations

P - - - - -

Prime Coat Painting

- P P P P P

Field Touch-up Painting of Damaged Shop Coats

- P P P P P

Rustproofing Field Cut and assembled Iron Supporting Frames and Racks

- P P P P P

Grating and Exterior Wall Louvers

P - - - - -

Duct Connections to Louvers

- - - P - -

Equipment Delivered and Set in Place

P - - - - -

Except Mechanical and Electrical Equipment by Divisions 15, & 16.

Vinyl Tape or Painted Color-coding, Banding Arrows and Similar Identification for Mechanical and Electrical Work.

P P P P P P


8 of 10


Underfloor and Header Duct

- - - - P -

Responsibility for coordination is included in this Section.

Lighting Fixtures

- - - - P - See Drawings

Elevators, Escalators and Dumbwaiters

P - - P - -

Power connections to disconnect switch included in Electrical Section.

Catwalks and Ladders to Electrical Equipment

P - - - - -

Food Service Equipment P - - - - -

Line connections included in each trade.

Services to Food Service Equipment

- P P P P -

Laundry - - - - - Line connections

Equipment P - - - - - Included in each trade.

Services to Laundry Equipment

- P P P P -

Roughing to equipment Furnished by Others

- P P P P -

D. Each Division is required to supply all necessary supervision and coordination

information to any other Division supplying work to accommodate that Division.

E. For items which are to be installed but not furnished as part of this Division, the electrical work includes:

1. Coordination of their delivery. 2. Unloading from delivery trucks driven into any point on the property line at grade

level. 3. Safe handling and field storage up to the time of permanent placement in the

project.


9 of 10

4. Correction of any damage, defacement or corrosion to which they may have been subjected.

5. Field make-up and internal wiring as indicated for their proper operation. 1.5POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Furnish approved operating instructions for each system and principal item of equipment for the use of the operation and maintenance personnel. The operating instructions shall include wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal item of equipment. Operating instructions shall be printed or engraved, and shall be framed under glass or in approved laminated plastic and posted where directed. Operating instructions shall be attached to or posted adjacent to each principal item of equipment and include directions for start-up, proper adjustment, operating lubrication, shut-down, safety-precautions, procedure in the event of equipment failure, and other areas as recommended by the manufacturer of each item of equipment. Operating instructions exposed to the weather shall be made of weatherproof materials or shall be suitably enclosed to be weather protected. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.

1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and adequately protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the Engineer. Damaged or defective items, in the opinion of the Engineer, shall be replaced.

1.6 STANDARD PRODUCTS/SERVICE AVAILABILITY 1.6.1 Materials and Equipment

Materials and equipment shall be standard products of manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of similar material, design and workmanship. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to bid opening. The two year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.

1.6.2 Experience Required

The two years' experience must be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures.

1.6.3 Service Support

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. The Contractor shall submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.6.4 Manufacturer’s Nameplate

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.


10 of 10

1.7 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts located so that any person can come in close proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed or properly guarded. High-temperature equipment and piping so located as to endanger personnel or create a fire hazard shall be properly guarded or covered with insulation of a type as specified herein. Items such as catwalks, ladders, and guardrails shall be provided where required for safe operation and maintenance of equipment.

1.8 MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS

Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material.

1.9 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Electrical components of mechanical equipment and system such as motors, starters, and controls shall be provided under this Division and shall be as specified herein and as necessary for complete and operable systems. Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted. Interconnecting wiring for components of packaged equipment shall be provided as an integral part of the equipment. All interconnecting power wiring and conduit for field erected equipment and all control wiring rated over 100 volts and conduit shall be as specified in Division 16. Control wiring rated under 100 volts and conduit shall be as specified in Division 15. Motor control equipment forming part of motor control centers or switchgear assemblies and all necessary conduit and wiring connecting such assemblies, centers, or other power sources to mechanical equipment shall conform to Division 16.

******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 - Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

1 of 4

SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.


ASTM B 117 (1997) Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

1.1.2 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

ANSI C2 (1997) National Electrical Safety Code

1.1.3 National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

NEMA MG 1 (1998; Errata 1999) Motors and Generators

NEMA MG 10 (1994) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Fixed

Frequency Medium AC NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 1992) Energy Management Guide of

Selection and Use of Single-Phase Motors 1.1.4 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 70 (1999) National Electrical Code 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

This section applies to all sections of Division 15, "Mechanical" of this project specification, unless specified otherwise in the individual section.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications

Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.

1.3.2 Alternative Qualifications

Products having less than a two-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory tests, can be shown.

1.3.3 Service Support

The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment that includes their addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to


2 of 4

the equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

1.3.4 Manufacturer's Nameplate

Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.

1.3.5 Modification of References

In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar meaning, to mean the Engineer.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the Engineer. Replace damaged or defective items.

1.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their respective pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors shall conform to and have electrical connections provided under Electrical Section for Interior Distribution System. Furnish internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted. Controllers and contactors shall have a maximum of 120-volt control circuits, and shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of additional electrical service and related work shall be included under the section that specified that motor or equipment. Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the requirements of Electrical Section Interior Distribution System.

1.6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Electrical installations shall conform to ANSI C2, NFPA 70, and requirements specified herein.

1.6.1 New Work

Provide electrical components of mechanical equipment, such as BMS, motor starters, control or push-button stations, float or pressure switches, solenoid valves, integral disconnects, and other devices functioning to control mechanical equipment, as well as control wiring and conduit for circuits rated 100 volts or less, to conform with the requirements of the section covering the mechanical equipment. Extended voltage range motors shall not be permitted. The interconnecting power wiring and conduit, control wiring rated 120 volts (nominal) and conduit, the motor control equipment forming a part of motor control centers, and the electrical power circuits shall be provided under Division 16, except internal wiring for components of package equipment shall be provided as an integral part of the equipment. When motors and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, provide any required changes to the electrical service as may be necessary and related work as a part of the work for the section specifying that motor or equipment.

1.6.2 High Efficiency Motors

a. High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors


3 of 4

Unless otherwise specified, single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors shall be high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11.

b. High Efficiency Polyphase Motors

Unless otherwise specified, polyphase motors shall be selected based on high efficiency characteristics relative to the applications as listed in NEMA MG 10. Additionally, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings shall meet or exceed energy efficient ratings in accordance with Table 12-6C of NEMA MG 1.

1.6.3 Three-Phase Motor Protection

Provide controllers for motors rated one 1.34 kilowatts one horsepower and larger with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, under voltage, and over voltage. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.

1.7 INSTRUCTION TO PERSONNEL

When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to the designated Owner personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Owner for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system. When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.

1.8 ACCESSIBILITY

Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTIONS 3.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT

New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.

3.1.1 Factory Painting Systems

Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that test the acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of


4 of 4

blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 3 mm (0.125 inch) on either side of the scratch mark. The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 50 degrees C (120 degrees F), the factory painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.

3.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces

Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 50 degrees C (120 degrees F) shall be cleaned to bare metal. Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be aluminum or light gray.

a. Temperatures Less Than 50 Degrees C (120 Degrees F): Immediately after cleaning,

the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 50 degrees C (120 degrees F) shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0076 mm (0.3 mil), one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0255 mm (one mil); and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.0255 mm (one mil).

b. Temperatures between 50 and 205 Degrees C (120 and 400 Degrees F) : Metal

surfaces subject to temperatures between 50 and 205 degrees C (120 and 400 degrees F) shall receive two coats of 205 degrees C (400 degrees F) heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of 0.05 mm (2 mils).

c. Temperatures Greater Than 205 Degrees C (400 Degrees F) : Metal surfaces subject

to temperatures greater than 205 degrees C (400 degrees shall receive two coats of 315 degrees C (600 degrees F) heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm (2 mils).

******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 - Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specification Noise and Vibration Control

1 of 8

SECTION 15200 - NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The provisions of Section 15011, “Mechanical General Requirements,” apply to this section. 1.1.1 Machinery Vibration Criteria

Mechanical and electrical machinery and associated piping and ductwork shall be mounted on vibration isolators as indicated or specified and required to minimize transmission of vibrations and structure borne noise to the building structure or spaces or from the building structure to the machinery.

a. Vibration Isolation Application

The type of isolation, base, and minimum static deflection shall be as required for each specific equipment application, but not less than that given in the Vibration Isolation Schedule, when supported on a solid, minimum 150 pounds per cubic foot, concrete structural floor slab having a thickness of not less than 4 inches. Should vibration isolators installed for the machinery prove inadequate to prevent transmission of machinery vibration to the building structure or limit machinery vibration originated noise in the building spaces to their specified noise criteria levels, the isolators shall be replaced with units having the largest deflection that can be practicably installed, not less than 25 mm greater than the functioning isolators up to a total unit deflection of 125 mm.

b. Vibration Isolation Schedule and Selection Criteria

The minimum vibration isolation materials and equipment required for each piece of vibration isolated machinery shall be as indicated and selected for the lowest operating speed of the machinery.

Table I Vibration Isolator Equipment Schedule

Machine

Min. Static Deflection

(mm)

Description

1. Chillers 25 Housed spring isolators for floor mounting 2. Air Handling Units 50 Neoprene pads for floor mounting 3.

Chilled Water Pumps 25 Free-standing spring isolators for floor mounting

4. Centrifugal Inline Fan 25 Combination spring and rubber-in-shear hanger (suspended equipment)

5. Air Cooled Condensing Unit

12 Non-skid type neoprene rubber pad (floor mounted)

6. Wall Mounted Fan Coil Unit 9 Non-skid type neoprene rubber pad (wall- mounted)

7. Jockey pump and Fuel Oil transfer pump 9 Non-skid type neoprene rubber pad (floor

mounted) 8. Fire Pump 25 Free-standing spring isolators for floor

mounting 9. Generator Set 38 Free-standing spring isolators for floor

mounting


2 of 8

c. Vibration Isolator Procurement

For each piece of machinery to be vibration isolated, the machinery base, vibration isolators and other associated materials and equipment shall be supplied as a coordinated package by a single manufacturer or by the machinery manufacturer. Procure isolators selected to provide a uniform loading and deflection even when the machinery weight is not evenly distributed. This requirement does not include the flexible connectors or the hangers for the associated piping and ductwork.

1.2 DEFINITIONS 1.2.1 Decibels dB

Measure of sound level. Decibels are referenced to either 20 uPa for sound pressure levels or one pW for sound power levels. dBA is the overall "A" weighted sound level.

1.2.2 Machinery

In general, the vibration or noise producing equipment that must be isolated. 1.2.3 Manufacturer

The fabricator or supplier of vibration isolation materials and equipment. For mechanical equipment and machinery the term machinery manufacturer will be used.

1.2.4 Micro-Pascal UPa 10 to the minus 6 power newtons per square meter. 1.2.5 Pico-watt PW 10 to the minus 12 power watts. 1.3 SUBMITTALS Submit the following: 1.3.1 Manufacturer's Vibration Isolation Materials and Equipment Data

a. Vibration Isolators b. Equipment Bases c. Flexible Connectors d. Flexible Duct Connectors

Submit for each type and size of spring type isolator the spring outside diameter, deflection, operating spring height, solid spring height, and the ratio of the outside diameter to the spring height, the load to deflection ratio of the springs, and weight and sizes of structural steel members.

1.3.2 Machinery Manufacturer's Data

For each piece of indicated machinery to be vibration isolated, the calculated sound power data test data or sound pressure data presented as levels in dB in the eight octave bands between 63 and 8,000 hertz. Sound power levels shall be referenced to one PW and sound pressure levels to 20 UPa. In addition, submit the overall "A" weighted scale sound pressure level in dB. Submit the standard test procedure used to obtain the sound power or pressure data and vibration isolation equipment size.


3 of 8

1.3.3 Shop Drawings and Design Calculations

Shop drawings and design calculations for machinery bases, rails and saddles prepared either by the machinery manufacturer for the recommended machinery mounting or by the vibration isolation equipment manufacturer. Drawings shall include isolator and anchor bolt layouts, sizes, specifications. Calculated spring static deflections for each item of machinery shall be compared with the specified minimum static deflection for each item of machinery to show that the calculated spring static deflections are not less than the minimum static deflections specified or indicated. Rated spring static deflections are not acceptable in lieu of calculated spring static deflections.

1.3.4 Certificates of Compliance

a. Neoprene b. Flexible Pipe and Duct Connectors

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

Vibration isolators, flexible connectors and their components shall be designed for easy replacement.

2.1.1 Corrosion Protection

Steel parts of vibration isolators except springs, shall be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Where steel parts are exposed to the weather, galvanized coating shall be at least 2 ounces of zinc per square foot of surface. Spring shall be neoprene coated.

2.1.2 Neoprene

Neoprene materials used in vibration isolators and seismic snubbers shall be oil-resistant in accordance with ASTM D 471.

2.1.3 Floor Mounted Isolators

a Neoprene Isolation Pads

Provide neoprene pads at least 6 mm (1/4-inch) thick with cross-ribbed or waffle design. For concentrated loads, provide steel-bearing plates bonded or cold cemented to the pads. Size pads for not more than 3.52 kg/cm2 (50 psi) or as recommended by the pad manufacturer.

b. Neoprene Isolators

Provide molded neoprene isolators having steel base plates with mounting holes and, at the top, steel mounting plates with mounting holes or threaded inserts. Neoprene elements shall be designed for operating on a straight-line deflection curve and loaded so that deflection does not exceed 15 percent of the free height of the elements. Elements shall be type and size coded with molded letters or numbers or color coded for capacity identification. Metal parts of neoprene elements shall be completely embedded in neoprene.

2.1.4 Spring Isolators and Protected Spring Isolators

Provide spring isolators or protected spring isolators that are adjustable, including, laterally stable free standing springs with horizontal stiffness at least 80 percent of the vertical (axial) stiffness. If included, machine attached and floor attached restraining elements shall be separated from metal-to-metal contacts by neoprene cushions 3 mm (1/8-inch) thick minimum. Neoprene acoustic friction pads at least 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick shall be provided.


4 of 8

a. Springs

Springs shall be securely fastened to base and compression plates and designed to spring ends remain parallel during and after deflection to operating height. Outside coil diameters shall be at least 0.8 of the operating height. At operating height, springs shall have additional travel to complete (solid) compression equal to at least 50 percent of the operating deflection.

b. Mounting and Adjustment

Provide base and compression plates with mounting holes or threaded fittings. Adjustment leveling bolts shall be rigidly bolted to machinery or base.

2.1.5 Suspension Type Isolators

Provide hangers with suspension type isolators encased in open steel brackets. Isolate hanger rods from isolator steel brackets with neoprene grommets.

a. Suspension Type Neoprene Isolators

Provide hangers with molded neoprene elements which conform with requirements for "Neoprene Isolators" except that elements shall be double deflection type with at least 10 mm (3/8-inch) deflection.

b. Suspension Type Spring Isolators

Provide hangers with springs, molded neoprene spring seats, and molded neoprene elements in series. Springs shall conform to requirements for springs of "Spring Isolators." Neoprene elements shall conform to requirements for "Neoprene Isolators." Provide isolators with adjustable spring preloading devices, where required, to maintain constant pipe elevations during installation and when pipe operational loads are transferred to the springs.

2.1.6 Vertical Stops

Stops shall be designed to be out of contact during machinery operation and to act as blocking devices during erection.

2.1.7 Steel Equipment Bases, Platform, Rails, and Saddles

Fabricate equipment bases, platforms, rails in accordance with AISC Manual of Steel Construction with AISC structural steel shapes of ASTM A36 steel. Welding shall conform to AWS D1.1 Design and sizes shall be as recommended by the machinery manufacturer and as indicated. Provide machinery bases, platforms, rails, and saddles of sufficient strength to resist distortion during construction or when machinery is in operation. Design calculations shall show that the maximum stress in any structural steel member will not exceed that allowed by the AISC Manual of Steel Construction during machinery operation.

a. Support Members and Brackets

Fabricate perimeter and equipment support members and brackets of structural steel shapes welded together to provide a full strength and rigid assembly. Provide vibration isolator mounting plates or brackets when required to reduce mounting height of equipment.


5 of 8

b. Rails and Saddles

Provide rails and saddles with bearing surfaces at least equal to equipment support bearing surfaces and with vibration isolator mounting plates brackets welded in place. Fabricate rails of one or more structural steel beams welded together into a rigid unit.

2.1.8 Flexible Connectors for Piping

Provide straight or elbow flexible connectors as indicated and rated for temperatures, pressures, and types of fluids to be conveyed. Flexible connectors shall be designed for 4 times operating pressure at highest system operating temperature. Elbow flexible connectors shall be manufactured with a permanently set angle.

a. Elastomeric Flexible Connectors

Provide elastomeric flexible connectors fabricated of multiple plies of tire cord fabric and elastomeric materials with integral reinforced elastomeric flanges with galvanized malleable iron back up rings. Provide steel restraint cables with fittings, nuts, steel washer, and acoustical washers where elongation would exceed manufacturer's limits at operating pressure. Elastomeric connectors shall have either tubular or spherical configuration as required or indicated. Spherical type straight connectors shall have two spheres. Elbows shall have one sphere, which forms the corner.

b. Metal Flexible Connectors

Provide flexible connectors fabricated of Grade E phosphor bronze, monel or stainless-steel corrugated tube covered with comparable bronze or stainless braid restraining and pressure cover. Stainless steel grades shall be 304, 316, or 321 as required for the application. Live lengths shall be as indicated, but not less than that recommended by the manufacturer for continuous vibration application.

2.1.9 Flexible Duct Connectors

Provide flexible duct connectors fabricated in accordance with SMACNA Accepted Practice for Industrial Duct Construction and HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible (HVACDCS). Flexible materials shall be rated for the temperatures, pressures, gases conveyed, and atmospheric conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Vibration Isolators

Install vibration isolation materials and equipment as indicated, in accordance with machinery manufacturer's recommendations.

3.1.2 Suspension Type Vibration Isolators

Provide suspension type isolation hangers for piping, suspended equipment in mechanical equipment rooms, as indicated and as specified. For operating load static deflections of 6 mm (1/4-inch) or less, provide neoprene pads or single deflection neoprene isolators. For operating load static deflections over 16 mm (5/16-inch) to 10 mm (3/8-inch), provide double-deflection type neoprene element isolators. For operating load static deflections over 10 mm (3/8-inch), provide isolators with spring and neoprene elements in series.

3.1.3 Vertical Stops

For equipment affected by wind pressure or having an operational weight different from installed weight, provide resilient vertical limit stops which prevent spring extension when weight is


6 of 8

removed. Provide vertical stops for machinery containing liquid, such as water chillers, boilers, and cooling towers. Spring isolated or protected spring isolated machinery must rock and move freely within limits of stops or seismic restraint devices.

3.1.4 Flexible Pipe and Duct Connectors

Install flexible connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated. Check connector alignment before and after filling of system and during operation. Correct misalignment without damage to connector and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. When liquid pulsation dampening is required, flexible connectors with spherical configuration may be used. Provide restraints for pipe connectors at pumps to prevent connector failure upon pump startup.

3.1.5 Machinery

Provide vibration isolators, flexible connectors as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Machinery with spring isolators must rock or move freely within limits of stop[s] or seismic snubber restraints.

a Stability

Isolators shall be stable during starting and stopping of machinery without any traverse and eccentric movement of machinery that would damage or adversely affect the machinery or attachments.

b. Lateral Motion

The installed vibration isolation system for each piece of floor or ceiling mounted machinery shall have a maximum lateral motion under machinery start up and shut down conditions of not more than 6 mm (1/4-inch). Motions in excess shall be restrained by approved spring type mountings.

c. Unbalanced Machinery

Provide foundation suspension systems specifically designed to resist horizontal forces for machinery with large unbalanced horizontal forces. Vibration isolator systems shall conform to machinery manufacturer's recommendations.

d. Roof and Upper Floor Mounted Machinery (Floor not bearing on earth)

Machinery installed on the roof or upper floors shall be mounted on isolators with vertical stops. Isolators shall rest on beams or structures designed and installed to prevent damage to roofs and floors caused by machinery vibration, wind, or seismic movement and to properly flash equipment supports and enable access to the roof surface for maintenance and repair in accordance with the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Plate 61.

3.1.6 Piping Applications

Provide vibration isolation for over 6 inches water column. The isolator deflections shall be equal to or greater than the static deflection of the vibration isolators provided for the connected machinery as follows:

a. Piping Connected to Vibration Isolated Machinery

For a distance of 15 meters (50 feet) or 50 pipe diameters, whichever is greater.


7 of 8

b. Equipment Spaces or Rooms

See paragraph above for piping and high-pressure ductwork connected to vibration isolated machinery requirements.

3.1.7 Chilled, Water Piping

Risers and from pumps to and including main supply and return risers and for 20 feet of the branch connection at each floor.

3.1.8 Water Distribution Piping Application

Resiliently support piping with combination spring and neoprene isolation hangers. The spring elements shall provide (5/8-inch) static deflection and the hanger spacing shall be installed so that the first harmonic natural frequency is not less than 360 Hz. The neoprene element shall be a double deflection type, which provides a minimum 10 mm (3/8-inch) static deflection. For 13 mm (1/2-inch) and smaller pipe the first two isolation hangers of each pipe connected to equipment shall have a deflection to the equipment isolation support static deflection. For 4-inch and larger pipe the first four piping isolation hanger supports from rotating equipment and for 12-inch and larger pipe the piping isolation hanger supports or supplementary steel supports, shall be suspended from resilient hanger rod isolators capable of supporting the above during piping installation at a fixed elevation regardless of load changes. These isolators shall incorporate an adjustable preloading device to transfer the load to the spring element within the hanger mounting after the piping system has been filled with water.

3.1.9 Pipe Penetrations

Provide Schedule 40 pipe sleeves and tightly pack annular space between sleeves and pipe with insulation. Provide bare pipe a one-inch thick mineral fiber sleeve the full length of the penetration and seal each end with an exterior and weather resistant non-hardening compound.

a Duct Penetrations

Pack openings around ducts with mineral fiber insulation the full length of the penetration. At each end of duct opening provide sealing collars and seal with an interior or exterior and weather resistant non-hardening compound.

b. Ducts Passing Through Equipment Rooms

Provide with sound insulation equal to the sound attenuation value of the wall, floor, or ceiling penetrated.

c. Machinery Foundations and Sub-bases

Provide cast in place anchor bolts as indicated or recommended by the machinery manufacturer.

d. Machinery Sub-bases

Provide concrete sub-bases at least 4 inches high for floor-mounted equipment. Rest sub-bases on structural floor and reinforce with steel rods interconnected with floor reinforcing bars by tie bars hooked at both ends. Provide at least 2-inch clearance between sub-bases and inertia bases, steel bases, and steel saddles with machinery in operation.

e. Common Machinery Foundations

Mount electrical motors on the same foundations and driven machinery. Support piping connections, strainers, valves, and risers on the same foundation as the pumps.


8 of 8

f. Anchor Bolts and Grout Secure machinery to foundations and inertia bases with anchor bolts. Grout equipment with base-plates, the full area under base-plates with premixed non-shrinking grout. After grout has set, remove wedges, shims, and jack bolts and fill spaces with grout.

g. Systems Not to Be Vibration Isolated

Vibration isolation shall not be provided for electrical raceways and conduits or for fire protection, storm, sanitary, gas, and domestic water piping systems which do not include pumps or other vibrating, rotating, or pulsating equipment including control and pressure reducing valves.

3.2 FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

Provide equipment and apparatus required for performing inspections and tests. Give the project Engineer 4 days notice prior to machinery sound and vibration testing.

3.2.1 Field Inspections

Prior to initial operation, the vibration isolators shall be inspected for conformance to drawings, specifications, and manufacturer's data and instructions.

3.2.2 Spring Isolator Inspection

After the installation of spring isolators of protected spring isolators, and seismic restraint devices, the machinery shall rock freely on its spring isolators within limits of stops or seismic restraint devices. Eliminate or correct interferences.

3.2.3 Tests

Check for vibration and noise transmission through connections, piping, ductwork, foundations, and walls. Adjust, repair, or replace isolators as required to reduce vibrations and noise transmissions to specified levels. Rebalance, adjust, or replace machinery with noise or vibration levels in excess of those given in the machinery specifications, or machinery manufacturer's data.


Vibration isolator, and pipe flexible connectors and flexible duct connectors shall be the number of sets and linear meters, respectively, actually installed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.



Payment will be made in accordance with the Bill of Quantities

******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 - Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Insulation of Mechanical Systems

1 of 9

SECTION 15250 - INSULATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements," with the addition and modifications

specified herein applies to this specification. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 Manufacturer's Data

a. Insulation b. Jackets c. Casings d. Vapor-barrier materials

e. Accessory materials 1.2.3 Standards Compliance Standards compliance labels are required on each container or package: a. Insulation b. Jackets c. Casings d. Vapor-barrier materials e. Accessory materials 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.3.1 Finished Spaces

Spaces used for habitation or occupancy where rough surfaces are plastered, paneled, or otherwise treated to provide a pleasing appearance.

1.3.2 Unfinished Spaces

Spaces used for storage or work areas where appearance is not a factor, such as unexcavated spaces and crawl space.

1.3.3 Concealed Spaces

Spaces out of sight. For example, above ceilings; below floors; between double walls; furred-in areas; pipe and duct shafts; and similar spaces.

1.3.4 Exposed

Open to view. For example, pipe running through a room and not covered by other construction.

1.3.5 Fugitive Treatments

Treatments subject to deterioration due to aging, moisture, high humidity, oxygen, ozone, and heat. Fugitive materials are entrapped materials that can cause deterioration, such as solvents and water vapor.


2 of 9

1.3.6 Outside

Open to view up to 1.52 m (5 feet) beyond the exterior side of walls, above the roof, and unexcavated or crawl spaces.

1.4 MANUFACTURER’S STAMP OR LABEL

Every package or standard container of insulation, jackets, cements, adhesives, and coatings delivered to the project site for use must have the manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving name of manufacturer, brand, and description of material. Insulation packages and containers shall be asbestos-free.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING SYSTEMS INSULATION

Piping systems (except buried pipe) requiring insulation, types of insulation required, and insulation thickness shall be as listed in Tables I and II herein. Insulation thickness as specified in Table II shall be one size greater for insulated piping systems located outside. Unless specified, insulate all fittings, flanges, and valves, except valve stems, hand wheels, and operators. Use factory premolded, precut or field-fabricated insulation. Exterior shall be factory cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking and non-peeling. Pipe insulation shall conform to the referenced publications in Table I. Insulation thickness for all types of exterior pipe exposed to outside shall be 25 mm (1-inch) thicker than specified on Table II.

2.1.1 Flexible Unicellular Insulation ASTM C 534

The minimum density limit of 72.179 kg per cubic meter (4.5 pounds per cubic foot) may be waived if all other characteristics of the standard are met.

2.1.2 Piping Insulation Finishes 2.1.2.1 All-Purpose Jacket

Provide aluminum jackets on exposed piping. Allow a maximum water vapor permeance of 0.05 perms per ASTM E 96, a puncture resistance of not less than 50 Beach units, and a minimum tensile strength of 35 pounds-force per inch of width.

2.1.2.2 Vapor-Barrier Material

Type I. Resistant to flame, moisture penetration, and mold growth. Provide vapor-barrier material on pipe insulation as required in Table I.

2.1.2.3 Metal Jackets

a. Aluminum Jackets

ASTM C921, Type II, metallic, Temper H14, 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) thick, smooth.

b. Piping, Fittings, Flanges, and Valves

Finish elbows and curved piping with fabricated metal covers. Finish tees, flanges, and valves with metal covers. Covers shall be same thickness and material as jackets on adjacent piping.

2.1.2.4 Vinyl Lacquer

Two coats of vinyl lacquer finish or equivalent according to the manufacturer’s recommendations for unicellular insulation located outside.


3 of 9

2.2 DUCTS & PLENUM INSULATION 2.2.1 Duct Insulation in Concealed Spaces for Supply / Return Air Duct

50-mm (2-in.) thick, 48 kg/m3 (3 pcf) rigid mineral fiber rigid insulation with a maximum conductivity of 1.38 watt-cm / m²-°C (0.31 Btu-in / hr-ft²-°F) at 23.89 °C (75°F) mean temperature as tested in accordance with ASTM C177.

2.2.2 Duct Insulation Not in Concealed Spaces for Supply, Return Air Duct and Fresh Air Duct

Mineral fiber per ASTM C 612, class 2 maximum temperature 204 degrees C (temperature 400degrees F) 48 kg / m³ (3 pcf, pounds per cubic foot) average, 50 mm (2 inch) thick, inside the building; and 96 kg/m³ (6 pcf) average, 62.5 mm (2.5 inch) thickness double layer construction outside the building.

2.2.3 Insulation Thickness for All Types of Ductwork Located Outside Provide insulation 15 mm (0.50 in.) thicker than specified herein. a. Duct Insulation Finishes b. All-Purpose Jacket

Provide a factory applied all-purpose jacket with or without integral vapor barrier as required by the service. Provide jackets in all exposed ductwork system including process exhaust duct. All-purpose jacket shall have a maximum water vapor permeance of 0.05 perms per ASTM E 96; a puncture resistance of not less than 50 Beach units; and a tensile strength of not less than 35 pounds-force per inch of width.

c. Vapor-Barrier Material

Type I for duct in equipment room and exposed areas and Type I or II in all other areas. Material shall be resistant to flame, moisture penetration, and shall not support mold growth. Provide vapor barrier on all HVAC supply duct insulation and process exhaust duct (where applicable).

d. Metal and Canvass Cloth Jackets

Provide metal jacket on all exposed ductwork system and at the clean areas. Canvass cloth jackets shall be provided on other areas without metal jackets.

(i) Aluminum Jackets: ASTM C 921, Type II metallic, Temper H14,

0.4 mm (0.016 inch) thick, smooth. 2.3 ADHESIVES, SEALANTS, AND COATING COMPOUND 2.3.1 Adhesive for Securing Insulation to Metal Surfaces and Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive (For Use in Building Interior Only)

Adhesive shall be of high bonding strength and won't crack, chip, peel, or shrink due to climatic condition and applicable for the intended purpose.

2.3.2 Lagging Adhesive

Class 1 for sealing the edges of and bounding fibrous glass tape to the joints of fibrous glass board; or for bonding lagging cloth to thermal insulation) or Class 2 (for attaching fibrous glass insulation to metal surfaces).


4 of 9

2.3.3 Vapor Barrier Coating Type II (indoor only above surface temperature 60°F) color white. 2.3.4 Weatherproof Coating

For outside applications use a weatherproof coating recommended by the manufacturer of the insulation and jackets.

2.3.5 Flexible Unicellular Insulation Adhesive Type II Class 1. 2.4 ACCESSORIES 2.4.1 Staples ASTM A167, Type 304 or 316 stainless steel outside-clinch types. 2.4.2 Insulation Bands 20 mm (¾ in.) wide; 0.52 mm (0.021 in.) galvanized steel. 2.4.3 Bands for Metal Jackets 10 mm (3/8 inch) minimum width; 0.50 mm (0.020-inch) aluminum. 2.4.4 Anchor Pins Provide anchor pins and speed washers recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 2.4.5 Glass Cloth and Tape

Type I Class 1 cloth and Type II class 1 or 3 tape. Tape shall be in 100 mm (4-inch) wide rolls. Class 3 tape shall be 4.5 ounces per square yard. In lieu of glass cloth and tape, open-weave glass membrane may be used.

2.4.6 Insulation for Generator Exhaust Pipe

Shall be provided with rigid calcium silicate or rigid rockwool insulation, suitable for high temperature application, UL/FM approved with aluminum cladding.

PART 3 - EXECUTIONS 3.1 PREPARATION

Do not insulate materials until all system tests have been completed and surfaces to be insulated have been cleaned of dirt, rust, and scale and dried. Insulate return ducts and supply ducts to the room outlets, flexible run-outs, plenums, casings, mixing boxes, filter boxes, coils, fans, and the portion of air terminals not in the conditioned spaces. Ensure full range of motion of equipment actuators. Modify insulation to avoid obstruction with valve handle, safety relief, etc. Allow adequate space for pipe expansion. Conditioned space shall be defined as an area, room or space normally occupied and being heated or cooled for human habitation by any equipment. Install insulation with jackets drawn tight and cement down on longitudinal and end laps. Do not use scrap pieces where a full-length section will fit. Insulation shall be continuous through sleeves, wall and ceiling openings, except at fire dampers in duct systems. Extend all surface finishes to protect all surfaces, ends, and raw edges of insulation. Apply coatings and adhesives at the manufacturer's recommended coverage per gallon. Individually insulate piping and ductwork. Provide moisture and vapor seal where insulation terminates against metal hangers, anchors and other projections through the insulation on surfaces for which a vapor


5 of 9

seal is specified. Keep insulation dry during the application of any finish. Bevel and seal the edges of exposed insulation.

3.2 PIPING INSULATION 3.2.1 Pipe Insulation

Place sections of insulation around the pipe and joints tightly butted into place. The jacket laps shall be drawn tight and smooth. Secure jacket with fire resistant adhesive conforming to Class 2, factory applied self-sealing lap, or stainless steel outward clinching staples spaced not over 100 mm (4 inches) on centers and 15 mm (1/2 inch) minimum from edge of lap. Cover circumferential joints with butt strips, not less than 3-inches wide, of material identical to the jacket material. Overlap longitudinal laps of jacket material not less than 40 mm (1 1/2 inches). Adhesive used to secure the butt strip shall be the same as used to secure the jacket laps. Apply staples to both edges of the butt strips. When a vapor barrier jacket is required, as indicated in TABLE I, or on the ends of sections of insulation that butt against flanges, unions, valves, and fittings, and joints, use a vapor-barrier coating conforming to Type II or manufacturer's weatherproof coating for outside service. Apply this vapor barrier coating at all longitudinal and circumferential laps. Patch damaged jacket material by wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and cementing, stapling, and coating as specified for butt strips. Extend the patch not less than 40 mm (1 1/2 inches) past the break in both directions. At penetrations by pressure gauges and thermometers, fill the voids with the vapor barrier coating for outside service. Seal with a brush coat of the same coating. Do not use staples to secure jacket laps on pipes carrying fluid medium at temperatures below 1.67°C (35°F). Where penetrating roofs, insulate piping to a point flush with the top of the flashing and seal with the vapor barrier coating. Butt tightly the exterior insulation to the top of the flashing and interior insulation. Extend the exterior metal jacket 50 mm (2 inches) down beyond the end of the insulation. Seal the flashing and counter-flashing underneath with the vapor barrier coating. For chilled and cold water piping, use flexible unicellular insulation including for refrigerant suction piping.

3.2.2 Flexible Unicellular Insulation

Bond cuts, butt joints, ends, and longitudinal joints with adhesive conforming to Type II, Class 1. Miter 90-degree turns and elbows, tees, and valve insulation. Where pipes penetrate firewalls, provide mineral-fiber insulation inserts and sheet-metal sleeves. Insulate flanges, unions, valves, and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Apply two coats of vinyl lacquer finish to flexible unicellular insulation in outside locations.

3.2.3 Hangers and Anchors

Pipe insulation shall be continuous through pipe hangers. Where pipe is supported by the insulation, provide MSS SP-58, Type 40 galvanized steel shields or MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles conforming to MSS SP-69. Where shields are used on pipes 50 mm (2 inches) and larger, provide insulation inserts at points of hangers and supports. Insulation inserts shall be of cellular glass (minimum 8 pcf), molded glass fiber (minimum 8 pcf), or other approved material of the same thickness as adjacent insulation. Inserts shall have sufficient compressive strength to adequately support the pipe without compressing the inserts to a thickness less than the adjacent insulation. Insulation inserts shall cover the bottom half of the pipe circumference 180° and be not less in length than the protection shield. Vapor-barrier facing of the insert shall be of the same material as the facing on the adjacent insulation. Seal inserts into the insulation with vapor barrier coating, Type II or for exterior work, manufacturers recommended weatherproof coating, as applicable. Where protection saddles are used, fill all voids with the same insulation material as used on the adjacent pipe. Where anchors are secured to chilled piping that is to be insulated, insulate the anchors the same as the piping for a distance not less than four times the insulation thickness to prevent condensation. Vapor seal insulation around anchors.


6 of 9

3.2.4 Sleeves and Wall Chases

Where penetrating interior walls, extend a metal jacket 50 mm (2 inches) out on either side of the wall and secure on each end with a band. Where penetrating floors, extend a metal jacket from a point below the back-up material to a point 250 mm (10 inches) above the floor with one band at the floor and one not more than 25 mm (one inch) from end of metal jacket. Where penetrating exterior walls, extend the metal jackets through the sleeve to a point 50 mm (2-inches) beyond the interior surface of the wall.

3.2.5 Flanges, Unions, Valves and Fittings

Insulation (Except Flexible Unicellular) factory fabricated removable & reusable insulation covers maybe used. For A/C condensate. drain, place factory pre-molded, precut or field-fabricated segmented insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation around the flange, union, valve, and fitting abutting the adjoining pipe insulation. If nesting size insulation is used, overlap 50 mm (2 inches) or one pipe diameter whichever is larger. Use insulating cement to fill voids. Elbows insulated using segments shall have not less than three segments per elbow. Place and joint the segments with manufacturers recommended water vapor resistant, fire retardant, and adhesive appropriate for the temperature limit of the service. Upon completion of installation of insulation, apply two coats of Class 1 lagging adhesive with Class 3 glass tape embedded between coats. Overlap tape seams one inch. Extend adhesive onto adjoining insulation not less than 50 mm (two inches). The total dry film thickness shall be not less than 1.56 mm (1/16 inch). Where unions are indicated not to be insulated, taper the insulation to the union at a 45-degree angle. Coat the insulation and all-purpose jacket with two coats of Class 1 lagging adhesive and with Class 3 glass tape embedded between coats. The total dry film thickness shall be not less than 1.56 mm (1/16 inch). Factory pre-molded field fabricated segment or blanket insert insulation shall be used under the fitting covers. Install factory pre-molded one-piece PVC fitting covers over the insulation and secure by stapling, taping with PVC vapor barrier tape, or with metal or plastic tacks made for securing PVC fitting cover. Do not use PVC fitting cover where exposed to weather. Limit the use of PVC fitting cover to ambient temperatures below 65.56 degrees C (150 degrees F).

3.2.6 Piping Exposed to Weather a. Metal Jackets

Install over the insulation. Metal jackets shall have side and end lap at least 50 mm (2-inches) wide with the cut edge of the side tap turned inside one inch to provide a smooth edge. Overlap the jacket not less than 50 mm (2 inches) at longitudinal and circumferential joints and secure with metal bands at not more than 225 mm (9-inch) centers or with screws at not more than 125 mm (5-inch) centers. Overlap longitudinal joints down to shed water. Seal circumferential joints with a coating recommended by the insulation manufacturer for weatherproofing.

b. Flanges, Unions, Valves, Fittings, and Accessories

Insulate and finish as specified for the applicable service. Apply two coats of an emulsion type weatherproof mastic for hot service and vapor barrier mastic for cold service recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Embed glass tape in the first coat. Overlap tape not less than 25 mm (1 inch) and the adjoining metal jacket not less than 50 mm (2 inches). Factory preformed metal jackets may be used in lieu of the above for hot service.

3.3 DUCTS & PLENUMS INSULATION 3.3.1 Rigid Insulation

Secure rigid insulation by impaling over pins or anchors located not more than 75 mm (3 inches) from joint edges of boards, spaced not more than 300 mm (12 inches) on centers and secure


7 of 9

with washers and clips. Spot weld anchor pins or attach with a waterproof adhesive especially designed for use on metal surfaces. Apply insulation with joints tightly butted. Neatly bevel insulation around name plates and access plates and doors. Each pin or anchor shall be capable of supporting a 9-kg. (20-pound) load. Cut off protruding ends of pins, after clips are sealed with coating compound conforming to Class II for inside work or manufacturer's recommended weatherproof coating for outside work, and reinforced with open weave glass membrane.

3.3.2 Flexible Blanket Insulation

Apply insulation with all joints tightly butted. Secure insulation to ductwork with adhesive in 150 mm (6-inch) wide strips on 300 mm (12 inch) centers. Staple laps of jacket with outward clinching staples and seal with foil scrim kraft (FSK) tape. For ductwork over 600 mm (24-inches) on horizontal duct runs, provide pins, washers and clips. Use pins on sides of vertical ductwork being insulated. Space pins and clips on 450 mm (18 inch) centers and not more than 450 mm (18 inches) from duct corners. Carry insulation over standing seams and trapeze-type hangers. Install speed washers with pins and pin trimmed to washer. Sagging of flexible duct insulation will not be permitted. Cut off protruding ends of pins after clips are secured and sealed with coating compound conforming to Type II for inside work.

3.3.3 Insulation Finishes and Joint Sealing

Fill all breaks punctures, and voids with vapor barrier coating compound conforming to Class II for inside work or manufacturer’s recommended weatherproof coating for outside service. Vapor seal all joints by embedding a single layer of 75-mm (3-inch) wide open weave glass membrane, 20 by 20 mesh maximum size between two 1.56 mm (1/16-inch) wet film thickness coats of Type II vapor barrier coating compound. Draw glass fabric smooth and tight with a 40 mm (1 1/2-inch) overlap. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper operating rods, fill voids in the insulation with Type II vapor barrier coating. Brush a coat of Type II vapor barrier coating where required on HVAC ducts. Provide vapor barrier jacket continuous across seams, reinforcing, and projections. Where height of projections is greater than insulation thickness, carry insulation and jacket over the projection.

3.3.4 Exhaust Duct Insulation for Process Equipment where applicable

For exhaust ducts for process equipment provide insulation with 3.75 mm (0.15-inch) thick galvanized steel bands spaced not over 300 mm (12 inches) on centers; or 16-gauge galvanized steel wire with corner clips under the wire; or with heavy welded pins spaced not over 300 mm (12 inches) apart each way. Do not use adhesives.

3.3.5 Access Plates and Doors

On acoustically lined ducts, plenums, and casings, provide insulation on access plates and doors. On externally insulated ducts, plenums, and casings, provide insulation-filled hollow steel panels and doors for access openings. Bevel insulation around access plates and doors.

3.4 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION Paint in accordance with Section 09900, "Painting of Buildings." 3.5 FIELD INSPECTION

Visually inspect to ensure that materials used conform to specifications. Inspect installations progressively for compliance with requirements.


8 of 9

Table I INSULATION MATERIAL FOR PIPING

Service Material Specs Type Class Vapor Barrier Required

Chilled Water, Supply/Return

Flexible Unicellular (Closed Cell elastomeric thermal insulation)

ASTM C524 II I Yes

Diesel Engine Exhaust Calcium Silicate ASTM C 533 I or II No

Refrigerant Suction Piping

Flexible Unicellular (Closed Cell Electromeric Thermal Insulation)

ASTM C534 I or II No

A/C condensate inside the Building

Flexible Unicellular (Closed Cell Elastoeric thermal Insulation)

ASTM C534 I or II I Yes

Table II

PIPING INSULATION WALL THICKNESS (mm) 5 - 30 40-76 90-125 150-225 SERVICE MATERIAL (1/4"-1 1/4") (1 1/2-3) (3 1/2-5) (6-9) Chilled Water Flexible Unicellular 50 50 50 50 (Supply & Return) Refrigerant Flexible Unicellular 50 50 50 50 Suction & Liquid Piping A/C condensate Flexible Unicellular 19 19 19 19 Drain located inside the bldg. Diesel Engine Calcium Silicate 150 150 150 150 Exhaust Piping or Rock wool Expansion tanks Flexible Unicellular 50 50 50 50 Air Separators

3.6 SCHEDULE OF INSULATION THICKNESS

The thickness of the insulation applied to pipes, ducts and equipment shall be as stated hereinafter.

Service Location Pipe Diameter Insulation Thickness

Inches (mm) (mm) - A/C condensate indoor --- 19

Drain pipes


9 of 9

- Domestic hot and Return water pipes --- up to 1 5/8” 12 - Ditto --- 2 1/8” and larger 32 - Ditto running on roof --- as above with And in mechanical aluminium jacketing Rooms - Cold water running on --- as above with aluminum Roofs only jacketing - Chilled water pipes --- up to 2 ½” 50 - Ditto --- 3” to 8” 50 - Ditto --- 10” and above 63 - Supply and return air in conditioned spaces --- 40 Ducts - Supply and return air in conditioned spaces --- 50 Ducts - Acoustic Duct Liner --- --- 25 - Range Hood Exhaust --- --- 50 -Dishwasher exhaust --- --- 38 Duct -Refrigerant suction line --- --- 50 4.0 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

Insulation shall be measured by the number of linear meters actually installed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.




******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 - Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Fuel Oil Handling System

1 of 7

SECTION 15483 - FUEL OIL HANDLING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS


1.1.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications: ANSI B 16.3-77 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI B 16.5-81 Pipe Flanges, and Flanged Fittings B 16.11-80 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and

Threaded B 16.39-77 Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions B 18.2.1-81 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws B 31.1-83 Power Piping B 31.3-84 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping B 31.4-79 Liquid Petroleum Transportation Piping Systems Z 49.1-83 Safety in Welding and Cutting 1.1.2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Publications

ASME A 120-84 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, For Ordinary Use

ASME A 307-84 Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners 1.1.3 American Welding Society (AWS) Publication AWS SP-58-83 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture AWS SP-69-83 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application 1.1.4 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications NFPA 30-81 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code NFPA 31-83 Installation of Oil Burning Equipment 1.1.5 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Publications UL 842-80 Valves for Flammable Fluids 1.1.6 American Petroleum Institute (API) Publications

STD 600-81 Steel Gate Valves, Flanged and Butt welding & Erratum 84 Ends


2 of 7

1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This section includes all fuel oil piping, fuel oil pumps, fuel oil storage tank, fuel oil day tank and related auxiliary equipment for a fuel oil handling system.

1.3 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED

The submittal requirements of Section 15011, “Mechanical General Requirements", apply to the following list.

1.3.1 Manufacturer's Data

a. Pipe

b. Fittings

c. Valves

d. Flexible hose

e. Strainers

f. Pressure gage

g. Pumps

h. Tanks

1.3.2 Shop Drawing

Submit shop drawings showing the construction detail & general arrangement of storage tank, day tank, tank supports, spill containment and connecting piping including clearances, principal dimensions and all component details. Shop drawings shall be accompanied by design calculations verifying the size of structural member, structural supports fittings, rods, brackets and other components.

a. Instrumentation and control wiring diagram 1.3.3 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1.3.4 Welding a. Welder's Performance Qualification Record

Before any welder or operator performs any welding the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer three copies of the Welder's Performance Qualification Record in conformance with ANSI B 31.1 showing that the welder was tested under the approved procedure specification submitted by the Contractor. Welders making defective welds after passing a qualification test shall be required to take a re-qualification test. Welders failing the re-qualification tests will not be permitted to work under this contract.

b. Previous Qualifications

Welding procedures, welders, and welding operators previously qualified by test may be accepted for this contract without re-qualification subject to approval provided that all the conditions specified in ANSI B 31.1 are met before a procedure can be used.

1.4 WELDING SAFETY ANSI Z 49.1


3 of 7

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL PIPING 2.1.1 Pipe ASTM A 120, Schedule 40 black steel, ERW. a. Threaded and Socket-Welding Fittings

ANSI B 16.11, forged steel, Class 2000 lb.

b. Threaded Fittings ANSI B 16.3, black malleable iron, Class 150 lb. c. Flanges and Flange Fittings

ANSI B 16.5, steel flanges or convoluted steel flanges. Flange faces shall have integral grooves of rectangular cross section which afford containment for self-energizing gasket material.

2.1.2 Vent Piping

Zinc-coated steel ASTM A 120 standard weight, with zinc-coated malleable iron fittings ANSI B 16.3.

2.1.3 Valves a. Steel Gate Valves API 600, oil service, Class 150. b. Relief Valves

UL 842, steel or bronze bodies, corrosion - resistant valve seats, and positive closing to prevent leakage.

2.1.4 Piping Accessories a. Flexible Hose

Flexible metal hose, corrugate type with braided wire sheath covering, close-pitch annular corrugations, rated for a working pressure of at least 8.62 bars (125 psig), 200 mm (8- inch) minimum live length, flanged end connections, UL listed for flammable liquid service. Metal for hose and braided wire sheet shall be stainless steel, any type of ASTM 300 series.

b. Unions ANSI B 16.39, Class 150 lb. c. Welding Filler Metal ANSI B 31.4 and compatible with the materials to be welded d. Hangers Supports

Design, selection, fabrication, installation, and spacing shall conform to MSS-SP-69. All hangers, supports, rods, anchors, nuts, bolts and washers shall be hot-dip galvanized. Hangers and supports shall be of the adjustable type.


4 of 7

e. Strainers

Single basket type, with inlet and outlet on the same center line. Cast steel or fabricated steel body. Open area of one basket shall be 2 1/2-times inlet or outlet piping area. Furnish one spare basket.

2.1.5 Instruments

Tank gauges, buoyant force type with direct reading dial. Thermometers shall be bi-metal dial type with stainless steel case, stem, and fixed thread connection; 5-inch diameter dial with glass face gasketed within the case; accuracy within one percent of scale range. Provide scale range suitable for the intended service.

2.1.6 Protective Coating Systems For Buried And Steel Piping a. Buried Piping and Fittings

b. Piping and Fitting: New steel pipe and fittings shall receive protective coal tar coating. 2.1.7 Protection For Aboveground Steel Pipe And Steel Tanks

Protect aboveground steel pipe and tanks against atmospheric corrosion by a coat of inorganic, zinc-rich primer. Apply bond or tie coat in accordance with specifications of manufacturer of prime coat and apply two finish coats of vinyl paint.

2.2 OIL PUMPS

Positive displacement type suitable for handling the type of fuel indicated. Pumps shall deliver the required capacities indicated. Mount pump and direct connect electric motor on extended base plate. Provide a drip pan with each pump. Use all metal flexible coupling between pump and drive. Provide pressure relief valve on discharge lines, pipes to return line. Provide single strainer on suction side. Motor starters on all oil pumps shall be lockable.

2.3 FUEL OIL STORAGE TANKS AND ACCESSORIES 2.3.1 Fuel Oil Storage Tanks

Construct fuel oil tanks of steel to comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 31. Each fuel oil tank shall have a 610 mm diameter manhole on top, with the same diameter extension neck, and bolted cover with gastight gasket. Tank shall include an exterior bolted ladder. Provide openings for fill, vent, pump suction, oil return, oil level gauge. Size vent pipes according to NFPA 30 and NFPA 31 but not less than 65 mm (2-1/2-inch) nominal inside diameter. Vent pipe shall connect to tapping at high end of tank and shall not extend more than one inch into tank.

2.3.2 Connections to Fuel Oil Tanks Provide the following connections:

a. Goose-neck vent caps.

b. Fill lines with removable single strainer and locking fill boxes.

c. A sounding connection, to permit entry of the gaging rod, with a locking cap. Provide graduated gaging rod and calibration chart.

d. Pump suction lines with internal vertical pipes extending to within 4 inches of tank

bottom. e. Nylon dielectric brushings on pipe connections to steel tanks.


5 of 7

f. Hold down straps for steel tanks with inert insulating dielectric material between strap and tank. Protect ferrous hold down accessories with a coating to prevent corrosion.

2.4 FUEL OIL DAY TANK

Provide a day tank for generator set with capacity indicated in the plans. Construct tank of not less than 5 mm (3/16 inch) steel plate, with welded joints and necessary stiffeners on exterior of tank. Include connections for fuel inlet, fuel return, drain, overflow, level switches, and vent. Day tank shall be elevated and be provided with structural support. Height of day tank shall be determined by the engine supplier.

2.5 LEVEL SWITCHES

External float cage, mercury contact, single- pole, single-throw type. One set of switches shall be for high and low level alarms and another set of switches shall be for starting and stopping the fuel oil transfer pump. Arrange high level alarm switches to close on fall of liquid level. Arrange level control switches so that the low level switch closes and energizes the fuel oil transfer pump at a present low level; the high level switch opens and de-energizes the fuel oil transfer pump at a present high level. Mount units with isolating valves and drains valves. Mercury contacts shall be arranged for 48-volt, d.c. operation. Level alarm switches on fuel oil tanks shall be Underwriters' Laboratories approved type for use on fuel oil tanks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 General Installation Requirements for Oil Piping

Install piping in out-of-the-way locations, in a manner that will minimize cutting of beams, girders, columns, or load-bearing members. Piping shall be free from traps and shall drain towards tank and equipment. Installation of oil piping and equipment in building shall conform to NFPA 30 and 31, except as indicated or specified herein.

3.1.2 Pipe Sleeves

Provide where piping passes through walls, and partitions. Secure sleeves in proper position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls, and partitions. Provide not less than 1/4- inch space between exterior of piping or pipe insulation and interior of sleeve. Firmly pack space with insulation and calk at both ends of the sleeve with plastic waterproof cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or provide a segmented elastomeric seal.

a. Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls

Provide ASTM 120, Schedule 40 or Standard Weight, zinc-coated steel pipe sleeves.

b. Sleeves in Partitions and Other Than Masonry and Concrete Walls Provide zinc-coated steel sheet minimum 26 gage.

3.1.3 Steel Piping

Steel piping 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller shall be threaded. Steel piping 2 1/2 inches and larger shall be butt-welded. Flanges may be used for valves and equipment installation. Piping joints shall conform to ANSI B 31.3.

3.1.4 Threaded Joints in Piping

Use a lubricant or polytetrafluoroethylene tape on male threads of screwed joints. Red or white lead and zinc compound may be used. Piping shall be free from fins and burrs. Ream or file


6 of 7

out pipe ends to size of bore and remove chips. Attach screwed flanges by screwing the pipe through the flange, and reface pipe and flange accurately.

3.1.5 Welding a. Welding of Piping

Welding of joints in piping, butt welds, fillet welds, bends, loops, offsets, and cleaning of pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI B 31.1 All welds shall be visually examined and meet acceptance standards indicated in Chapter VI of ANSI B 31.1.

3.1.6 Unions and Flanges

Place unions and flanges where necessary to permit easy disconnection of piping and apparatus. Each connection having a threaded end valve shall have a union.

3.1.7 Valves Install valves in positions accessible for operation and repair. 3.1.8 Steel Fuel Oil Storage Tanks

Install storage tanks, vents and other connections in accordance with NFPA 30, NFPA 31, recommendations and published instructions of the manufacturer, and as indicated.

a. Aboveground Fuel Oil Tanks

Fasten aboveground fuel oil tanks on a firm reinforced concrete foundation. Provide fireproofed steel supports between tank and foundation.

3.2 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTION

Prior to application of test pressure, remove or valve off piping components this may be damaged by test and install a calibrated test gauge in the system. Maintain test pressure for at least one hour. In the event of leakage, locate and repair leak by re-welding and repeat test. Materials and equipment shall be subject to inspection at the installation site by the Engineer.

3.2.1 Piping Test

Perform hydrostatic test of fuel oil piping at 1 1/2 times system pressure or 100 psig whichever is greater.

3.2.2 Steel Fuel Oil Day Tanks

Test tanks for leaks by applying internal air pressure and using soapsuds, linseed oil or equivalent material on all external welds. For horizontal tanks, the test pressure shall be not less than 5 or more than 7 psig.


Pipes, valves & other piping accessories shall be either counted or measured by linear meters, actually installed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.


7 of 7




******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 - Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Chilled Water Piping Systems

1 of 19

SECTION 15652 - CHILLED WATER PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS


1.1.1 Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Publications

590-81 Reciprocating Water Chilling Packages 1.1.2 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications B15.1-84 Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus, Safety

Standards for 1.1.3 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

Publications

15-78 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration 1.1.4 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Publications

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code : Section VIII, Division 1, 1986, with agenda

1.1.5 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications

A 123-84 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on iron and steel products

B 177-85 Salt Spray (Fog) Testing

D 1654-79a Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens (R 1984) Subject to Corrosive Environments

1.1.6 National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Publications

ICS-1-83 General Standards for Industrial Control and

System ICS-2-83 Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assembles MG-178 Motors and Generators

1.1.7 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications

70-87 National Electrical Code (NEC)

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements," applies to this section with additions and modifications specified herein.


2 of 19

1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 Manufacturer's Data

a. Piping and Fittings

b. Gaskets

c. Valves

d. Piping Accessories

e. Instrumentation

f. Hangers and Supports

g. Pumps

h. Motors and Motor Starters

i. Air Separator

j. Expansion tank

1.3.2 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions

a. Pumps (CHWP)

b. Air Separator

c. Expansion Tank

1.3.3 Certificates of Conformance: Materials and equipment. 1.3.4 Welding Submittals As required by ANSI B31.9 and ANSI B31.5 1.3.5 Refrigerant Submittals

a. Safe Handling Procedures

b. Materials Safety Data Sheets

1.3.6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals Furnish for the following

a. Water Chillers

b. Pumps (CHWP)

c. Flow Measuring Equipment

1.3.7 Shop Drawings

a. Piping Layout.

b. Instrumentation and Control Wiring Diagrams

c. Pumps and Motor Starters

d. Air Separator

e. Expansion Tank


3 of 19

1.4 WELDING REQUIREMENTS 1.4.1 Welding Procedures

Before any welding is performed, the Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Engineer three copies of welding procedure specification for all metals included in the work, together with proof of its qualifications in accordance with ANSI B31.9 and ANSI B31.5.

1.4.2 Performance Qualification Record

Before any welder or operator performs any welding, the Contractor shall also submit to the Contracting Engineer three copies of the Welder's Performance Qualification Record in conformance with ANSI B31.9 and ANSI B31.5 showing that the welder was tested under the approved procedure specification submitted by the Contractor. In addition, the Contractor shall submit the assigned number, letter, or symbol used to identify the work of the welder, and affix it immediately upon completion of the weld. Give welders making defective welds, after passing a qualification test, a re-qualification test and do not permit them to work under this contract if they failed the re-qualification test.

1.4.3 Previous Qualifications

Welding procedures, welders, and welding operators previously qualified by test may be accepted for this contract without re-qualifying subject to the approval of the Contracting Engineer and provided that all the conditions specified in ANSI B31.9 and ANSI B31.5 are met before a procedure is used.

1.5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

The piping systems as specified in this section include chilled water. Systems include piping, flanges, bolting, gaskets, valves, fittings, pressure containing assemblies, flow measuring equipment, flow control equipment, and circulating pumps hangers and supports.

1.6 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1.6.1 Refrigerant Piping Safety ANSI 15 a. Refrigerant Handling

Follow safety regulations and refrigerant manufacturer's instructions to prevent hazardous exposure to personnel.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CHILLED WATER PIPING, FITTINGS, AND ACCESSORIES Materials and dimensions. 2.1.1 Chilled Water Piping

Provide ERW, Schedule 40, black steel pipe, Grade A, except Grade B for bending purposes. 2.1.2 Fittings and Flanges for Chilled Water Piping 2.1.2.1 Sizes 6 to 50 mm (1/4 to 2 inches) Malleable iron fittings, ANSI B16.3, threaded type, Class 150.


4 of 19

2.1.2.2 Sizes 65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and above

Steel fittings, ANSI B16.9, butt-welding type, not less than 150 psi pressure rating, or ANSI B16.5, flanged type, Class 150, or convoluted steel flanges conforming to ASME, Boiler and Pressure, Code Section 8; Cast iron fitting, ANSI B16. 1 flanged type, Class 125; Bronze fittings up to 300 mm (12-inch) size, ANSI B16.24, flanged type, Class 125.

2.1.3 Unions 2.1.3.1 Unions (threaded) for Steel Pipe Class 150 50 mm (2 inches) and smaller, or MSS SP83 2.1.3.2 Dielectric Union

Provide insulated union of galvanized steel and female threaded on end. Union shall have water impervious insulation barrier capable of limiting galvanic current to one percent of the short circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic joint. When dry, insulation barrier shall be able to withstand a 600-volt breakdown test.

2.1.4 End Connections 2.1.4.1 Steel Piping

50 mm (2 inches) and smaller shall be threaded or socket welded; 65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and larger shall be flanged or butt welded.

2.1.4.2 Threaded Joints Thread in accordance with ANSI B2.1 2.1.4.3 Flanged Joints a Bolting of Flanges

Material used for bolts and studs shall conform to ASTM A 307, Grade B, and material for nuts shall conform to ASTM A 194, Grade 2. Dimensions of bolts, studs, and nuts shall conform to ANSI B18.2.1 and ANSI B18.2.2 with threads conforming to ANSI B1.1 coarse type with Class 2A fit for bolts and studs, and Class 2B fit for nuts. Bolts or with Class 2A fit for bolts and studs, and Class 2B fit for nuts. Bolts or studs shall extend through the nuts and may have reduced shanks of a diameter not less than the diameter at root of threads. Carbon steel bolts shall have American Standard regular square or heavy hexagon heads and shall have American Standard heavy, semi-finished hexagonal nuts.

b. Gaskets

ASTM D 2000, fluorinated elastomers, suitable for the pressure and temperature ranges encountered, and compatible with grooves in flange faces. Dimensions for nonmetallic gaskets shall conform to ANSI B16.21.

2.1.4.4 Butt Weld Joints

Shall conform to ANSI B31.9. The use of backing rings shall conform to ANSI B31.9. Ferrous rings shall be of good weldable quality and not exceed 0.05 percent sulfur; for alloy pipe, backing rings shall be of material compatible with the chemical composition of the parts to be welded and preferably of the same composition. Backing rings shall be of the continuous machined or split-band type.


5 of 19

2.1.5 Valves

Gate, Globe, Angle, Check, Special, and Related Equipment: Shall conform to the following paragraphs. End connections shall conform to paragraph entitled "End Connections." Valves shall have rising stems and shall open when turned counterclockwise.

2.1.5.1 Gate Valves a. Bronze Gate Valves, 50 mm (2 Inches and Smaller)

MSS SP80, wedge disc, rising stem, inside threaded type. Provide solder-joint ends when used with copper tubing, and not less than 68 kg (150-pound) class.

b. Steel Gate Valves

ANSI B16.34, Class 150, outside screw-and-yoke type with solid wedge or flexible wedge disc, with trim of heat-and corrosion-resistant steel as recommended by the manufacturer for the service indicated.

c. Cast Iron Gate Valves, 65 mm (2 1/2 Inches) and Larger

MSS SP70, Class 125 or 250, outside screw-and-yoke type with bronze trim. 2.1.5.2 Globe and Angle Valves a. Bronze, 65 mm (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller

MSS SP80, Class 150 with renewable seats and discs except internal slats for solder- end valves

b. Steel

ANSI B16.34, Class 150, with heat-and corrosion-resistant trim as recommended by the manufacturer for the service indicated, and provided with tapped drains and brass plugs.

c. Cast Iron, 65 mm (2 1/2 Inches) and Larger Class 125, with bronze trim, tapped drains, and brass plugs 2.1.5.3 Check Valves a. Bronze, 65 mm (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller MSS SP80, regrinding- swing- check type, Class 150. b. Steel, 65 mm (2 1/2 inches) and above

Class 150 with heat-and corrosion-resistant trim as recommended by the manufacturer for the conditions indicated.

c. Swing Check Valves Shall have bolted caps. d. Lift Check Valves 65 mm (2 Inches) and Smaller Shall have bolted caps.


6 of 19

e. Cast Iron Check Valves 65 mm (2 1/2 Inches) and Larger

Class 125 with bronze trim. Provide non-slam, eccentric-disc type for centrifugal pump discharge service.

2.1.5.4 Water Pressure-Reducing Valves ASSE 1003 2.1.5.5 Plug Valves

Cast iron or steel, lubricated, tapered plug Class 150, Size 65 mm (2 inches) and larger, End Connection: Flanged. Replaceable valve seat is not required.

2.1.5.6 Drain Valves

Gate valves conforming to MSS SP80, Class 150, manually operated 20 mm (3/4) pipe size and above, with threaded ends. Provide hose nipple adapters for connecting a hose to lead to a convenient floor drain.

2.1.5.7 Air Vent Valves

Automatic Type. The automatic-type air vent valves shall be of the ball-float type. Provide valves with cast iron bodies, 300 series corrosion- resistant steel float, linkage and removable seat of hardened, corrosion-resistant steel. Air vent valves on water coils shall have not less than 3 mm (1/8 inch) threaded end connections. Provide valves suitable for hot or cold water service and 8.85 kg/sq.m. (125 psi) minimum service pressure. Provide 20 mm (3/4-inch) pipe size for water mains and 15 mm (1/2-inch) minimum pipe size for all other applications.

2.1.5.8 Automatic Flow Control Valves

Individually selected and factory calibrated by the manufacturer for the service specified. The valves shall automatically limit the rate of flow of the system to the required design capacity regardless of system fluctuations. Submit certified performance date for each valve based on factory tests. Valves shall regulate flow within 5 percent of their tag rating over an operating pressure differential of at least 15 times the minimum required for control. Provide tamperproof valves with body tapping suitable for connecting instruments for verifying flow control performance. Provide the self-cleaning, cartridge-piston type with stainless steel, variable area orifices. Valves shall be bronze and designed for a minimum service pressure of 8.85 kg/sq. cm.-gauge (125 psig). Valve bodies shall have threaded soldered or flanged connections as required for pipe fittings. Furnish each automatic flow control valve with a valve kit located outside of insulation, and hose fittings suitable for use with the measuring instruments as indicated.

2.1.5.9 Butterfly Valves

MSS SP67, Type I tight shutoff valve, and valve ends shall be flanged. The valve body material shall be steel and bubble tight for shutoff at 10.62 kg/sq. cm. gauge (150 psig). Flanged and flangeless valves shall have 300 series corrosion-resistant steel stems and discs or bronze discs with molded elastomer disc seals. Flow conditions shall be for the regulation from maximum flow to complete shutoff by the throttling effect. Valves smaller than 200 mm (8 inches) shall have throttling effect. Valves 8 inches and larger shall have totally enclosed manual gear operators with adjustable balance return stops and indicators. Valves shall have a minimum of seven locking positions and shall be suitable for water temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).

2.1.5.10 Butterfly Valves 2 Inches and Smaller

One-piece and three-piece design with male or female threaded end connections and shall be bubble tight for shutoff at 10.62 kg/sq.cm.-gauge (150 psig). Provide 300 series corrosion


7 of 19

resistant steel stem and disc assembly. The disc seal shall be suitable for the liquid used in the system in which the valve is to be installed. The valves shall be suitable for water temperature up to 121 degrees C (250 degrees F) and capable of operating at the rated pressure of 10.62 kg/sq. cm.-gauge (150 psig). Provide valves designed for throttling service use with valve lever and indicator adjustment.

2.1.6 Miscellaneous Components for Piping System 2.1.6.1 Strainers

Class 125 Type I (single screen) for IPS sizes below 50 mm (2 inches) and Type II (single perforated basket) for sizes 50 mm (2 inch) and above. Provide Type 304 stainless steel element with 1.175 mm (0.047 inch) minimum diameter perforations, or Type 304 stainless steel screen. Select perforation diameter or screen mesh number suitable to protect the particular component indicated. Manual and automatic cleaners are not required.

2.1.6.2 Balancing Valve

Furnish and install as shown on plans, a calibrated (bronze/cast iron with bronze disc) balance valve equipped with readout valves to facilitate the connecting of a differential pressure meter. Each readout valve shall be fitted with an integral EPT check valve designed to protect the user from the system fluid before, during and after the monitoring of system flow. The balancing valve shall have an indexing pointer and calibrated nameplate to indicate the degree of closure of the precision machined orifice. Each balancing valve is to be constructed with internal EPT O-ring seals to prevent leakage around the rotating element.

2.1.6.3 Portable differential pressure meter Differential pressure meter and the balancing valve shall be made by only one manufacturer. 2.1.7 Instrumentation

Locate gauges and thermometers as indicated. Provide scale range suitable for the intended service.

2.1.7.1 Pressure and Vacuum Gauges ANSI B40.1 with restrictor; located as indicated. 2.1.7.2 Tank Gauges Located as indicated. 2.1.7.3 Indicating Thermometers Liquid-in-glass, or dial type. 2.1.7.4 Remote Reading Thermometers

Separable well type with the insertion length and sensitive portion length of the well and socket suitable for the piping and service intended.

2.1.8 Pumps

Centrifugal, single stage, End Suction water pumps for chilled water system shall be Type I-General Service, and shall have replaceable mechanical seals of material and style recommended by the manufacture for the particular service. Pumps shall have single suction with water passage for CHW piping. Impellers shall have radial flow. Select pumps so that the operating point on the selected impeller-curve will lie at or to the left of the shutoff side and not more than 5 percent below, the point of maximum efficiency for the impeller. Selected catalog


8 of 19

data shall include pump speed and characteristic curves for performance of impeller selected for each pump. Curves shall indicate capacity versus head, efficiency, and brake horsepower for full range, from shutoff to delivery. Contractor to submit CHW Pumps hydraulic calculations for approval prior to procurement of pumps. Calculation shall be sign & seal by a PME-Professional Mechanical Engineer of Contractor. (As per RA No. 8495).

2.1.8.1 Pump Motors

Motors shall conform to NEMA MG-1 and be suitable for the electrical characteristics as indicated. Provide totally enclosed type.

2.1.8.2 Motor Starters Motor starters shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 16. 2.1.9 Tanks 2.1.9.1 Closed Expansion Tank

Provide welded steel tank constructed and tested Hydrostatically in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME Boiler Pressure Vessel Code. The design minimum service pressure of the tank shall be 125 psig. The tank shall be zinc-coated inside and out after fabrication be ASTM A 386 hot-dip process. Tank shall have drain, fill, air charging and system connections. Tank shall be pressurized vertical floor-mounted precharged steel with integral heavy duty butyl rubber bladder.

2.1.9.2 Air Separation Tank

Provide steel tank, designed and constructed in accordance with Section 8 D-1 of the ASME Boiler and pressure Vessel Code and ASME labeled for 125 psig service pressure and factory tested for 150 psig. The capacity of the separator shall not be less than indicated. Tank shall have tangential connections, flanged type inlets and outlets. Each unit shall have an internal design suitable for creating the required vortex and subsequent air separation, for air release to the atmosphere and shall also have a galvanized steel strainer. Provide a blow-down connection with a gate valve piped to nearest floor drain.

2.1.10 Expansion Joints

2.1.10.1 Bellows Expansion Joints

Type 304 stainless steel corrugated bellows, reinforced with equalizing rings, internal sleeves, external protective covers, and ANSI B16.5 Class 150 flanged end connections. Provide limit stops to limit total movement in both directions. Cold set the joints to compensate for temperature at time of installation. Joints shall be designed to withstand 10,000 cycles over a period of 20 years. Joints shall be suitable for minimum working pressure of ANSI Class. Provide single or double bellows expansion joint as indicated. Provide first pipe alignment guide no more than 4 pipe diameter from the expansion joint; provide second pipe alignment guide no more than 14 pipe diameters for the first guide.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

Install piping and piping components to insure proper and efficient operation of the equipment, and controls in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide proper supports for the mounting of vibration isolators, stands, guides, anchors, clamps and brackets. Arrange piping connections to equipment so that removal of equipment or components of equipment including tube withdrawal from chillers, pump casing, shaft seals and similar work can be accomplished with the least amount of disassembly or removal of the piping system. Provide piping connected to equipment with vibration isolators with flexible connections which shall


9 of 19

conform to vibration and sound isolation requirements for the system. Electric isolation shall be provided between dissimilar metals to reduce the rate of galvanic corrosion.

3.1.1 Water Piping ANSI B31.9 3.2 CHILLED WATER PIPING 3.2.1 Fabrication and Assembly of Piping and Components

Welding, heating and soldering shall conform to ANSI B31.9 and as specified herein. Horizontal runs of piping shall pitch toward water chiller at not less than one inch in twenty feet. Provide sufficient pitch to assure adequate drainage and venting. Drain valves at low points of piping system, and automatic air vent valves at high points where air pockets would occur. All piping shall follow the general arrangement shown, cut accurately to measurements established for the work by the Contractor, and worked into place without springing or forcing, except where cold-springing is indicated. All piping and equipment within buildings shall be entirely out of the way of electrical conduit, lighting fixtures, equipment and doors, windows, and other openings. Run overhead piping in buildings in the most inconspicuous positions. Provide adequate clearance from walls, ceilings, and floors to permit the welding of joints; at least 150 mm (6 inches) for pipe sizes 300 mm (12 inches) and less, and in corners provide sufficient clearance to permit the welder to work between the pipe and one wall. Provision for expansion and contraction of pipe lines. Make changes in size of water lines with reducing fittings. Do not bury, conceal, or insulate piping until inspected, tested, and approved. Protect materials and equipment from the weather. Run all pipe to be insulated as shown and as required with sufficient clearance to permit application of insulation.

Do not miter pipe to form elbows, or notch straight runs to form full-sized tees, or utilize any similar construction. Except where shown otherwise, run vertical piping plumb and straight and parallel to walls. Thoroughly clean each section of pipe, fittings, and valves to be free of all foreign matter before erection. Prior to erection, hold each piece of pipe in an inclined position and thoroughly tap to loosen sand, mill scale, and foreign matter. Before all final connections are made to apparatus, wash the interior of all piping thoroughly with water. Blow out piping with high pressure steam or compressed air to remove rust scale, oil, and debris. Plug or cap open ends of mains during all shutdown periods. Do not leave lines open at any place where foreign matter might accidentally enter.

3.2.1.1 Strainers

Provide strainers in chilled water lines to protect orifices, automatic valves, pump and compressor from foreign materials. Locate strainers close to equipment to be protected. Install strainers with screen drum and in the direction of flow, as marked on the strainer body. Strainers shall have isolating service valves to permit servicing the strainer with minimum loss of fluid. Provide clearance for removal and replacing of strainer screens. The strainer shall have screens of ample net free area and be composed of materials which shall be compatible with the fluid being used. Use reducer fittings for changes in pipeline sizes and strainer connection sizes. Provide a pressure gauge with valve connection to inlet and outlet sides of strainer for determining pressure drop through the strainer, for indicating the need for cleaning.

3.2.1.2 Pumps

Support, anchor and guide so that no strains are imposed on pump by weight or thermal movement of the piping. Provide air vent valve on pump casing. Pipes drain outlets on pump bases to nearest floor or other acceptable drains, with necessary clean-out tees. Provide pig tails or pet cocks for pressure gauges on suction and discharge for water balancing measurements.

3.2.1.3 Valves


10 of 19

Install at equipment to allow maintenance or isolation, and to establish proper and sequential operation of the complete system. Shell and tube liquid coolers shall have fluid valves installed so that tubes are accessible for cleaning or replacing. Provide globe valves or plug cocks were required to regulate flow to obtain equal distribution of the gas or fluid handled. Remove valve bonnets, where valve construction permits removal, when connecting valves by brazing to copper tubing. Install globe and angle valves with stems horizontal where necessary to avoid trapping of fluid.

3.2.1.4 Air Vent Valves

Provide at high points in water piping and at water coils and water heat exchangers. Isolate valves and pipe to run off into the nearest floor drain.

3.2.1.5 Automatic Flow Control Valve

Automatic flow control valves may be installed in lieu of balancing valves and associated flow meter, orifice, as indicated or specified for constant flow application. If necessary, increase the system pump head to obtain the proper operating differential between body tapping for control of maximum flow; minimum allowance 0.14 kg/sq. cm. (2 psi), maximum allowance 0.212 kg/sq. cm. (3 psi). Verify correct flow by establishing that the operating pressure differential across the valve tapping is within the tag range. The pressure measuring apparatus shall be portable and consist of a carrying case, instructions, hoses and connections, and a push-button, three way valve which transmits either of two pressures at a pressure gauge. The pressure gauge shall have a 115 mm (4 1/2-inch) minimum diameter dial calibrated in increments of 0.0708 kg/sq.cm. (one psi) or less, and shall have a range of minus 1.041 kg/sq.cm.-gauge (14.7 psig) to plus 10.62 kg/sq.cm.-gauge (150 psig). Provide a higher pressure range gauge where system service pressure exceeds 8.85 kg/sq.cm.-gauge (125 psig). Where the flow-rate-pressure differential is marginal or deficient, use a portable flow meter to verify flow rate, when requested by the Engineer.

3.2.1.6 Pressure and Vacuum Gauge Provide a shutoff valve or pet cock between pressure gauges and the pipeline. 3.2.1.7 Thermometers

Provide thermometers and thermal sensing elements of control valves with a separate socket. Install separable sockets in pipe lines in such a manner to sense the temperature of the flowing fluid and minimize obstruction to flow.

3.3 MISCELLANEOUS DRAINS 3.3.1 Condensate Drains

Shall be zinc-coated steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 120. Provide drain piping from cooling coils to drain condensate. Trap drains at the exit point of the cooling coil and connect to the area drain system.

3.3.2 Cooling Coil Drain Pans

Galvanized steel with drain connections and lines to remove the condensate collected on the cold coil surface from the air stream. Pipe the condensate from the drain pan bottom to a disposal point outside of the coil casings and trap to ensure complete pan drainage.

3.4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Motor starters shall be provided complete with properly sized thermal overload protection and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control specified. Interlock chilled water pumps with the holding coils of the refrigeration compressor motor starters.


11 of 19

3.5 CLEANING OF SYSTEMS

When installations of the various components of the piping systems are completed, clean before final closing. Clean all piping and components of scale and thoroughly flush out all foreign matter. Provide temporary bypasses for all water coils to prevent valves flushing water from passing through coils. Clean all strainers and thoroughly. Wipe equipment clean, removing all traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots. Maintain the system in this clean condition until final approval. Clean and paint piping and equipment.

3.5.1 Safety Procedure

Ventilate work area, avoiding skin contact by using solvent resistant gloves. Observe precautions and warnings on the manufacturer's product labels.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING

Except that plastic, slip-on labels or tapes with pressure-sensitive adhesive may be used in lieu of painting or stenciling. Spacing of identification marking on runs shall not exceed 15 m (50 feet). Tag equipment, gauges, thermometers, valves, and controllers with tags of brass or approved nonferrous material and securely mount or attach.

3.7 FIELD INSPECTIONS

Prior to initial operation examine and inspect the piping systems for conformance to plans and specifications, ANSI B31.5 for refrigerant piping and ANSI B31.1 for chilled water piping. Equipment, material or work rejected because of defects or nonconformance with plans, specifications and ANSI Codes for pressure piping shall be corrected as directed by the Contractor.

3.8 FIELDS TESTS

After completion of the piping installation and prior to initial operation, conduct tests on the piping system. Furnish materials and equipment required for tests. Correct defects disclosed by the test. Perform test after installation and prior to acceptance in the presence of the Consulting Engineer and subject to his approval.

3.8.1 Water Piping

Hydrostatically test in accordance with the requirements of ANSI B31.9. Test piping system at one and one-half times system pressure but at least 7.08 kg/sq.cm.-gauge (100 psig) with water not exceeding 37.78 degree C (100 degrees F). Before tests, remove or isolate gauges, traps and other apparatus in the new system which may be damaged. Repair leaks tightening, re-welding joints. Do not calk joints renewing pipe or fittings. Install a calibrated, test pressure gauge in the system to observe loss in pressure. Maintain the required test pressure maintained for a sufficient amount of time to enable an inspection of joints and connections. Correct defects disclosed by the test.

3.9 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Provide in accordance with the requirements in Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements," including the following:

a. Piping System Diagrams

b. Codes

3.10 STARTUP AND OPERATIONAL TESTS


12 of 19

Start up and initially operates the refrigeration and chilled water system. During this time, periodically clean the various strainers until no further accumulation of foreign material occurs. Exercise care so that minimum loss of refrigerant occurs when strainers are cleaned. Adjust safety and automatic control instruments as necessary to place them in required operation and sequence.

PART 5 - VARIABLE SPEED PUMPING SYSTEM FOR SECONDARY CHILLED WATER PUMPS

5.1 Supply and install wherever shown on drawings split case pumps (as described before) and of capacities as shown on drawings.

a) Variable Speed Pumping Package

(1) Pumping Skid

(2) Pump Control Panel

(3) Adjustable Frequency Drive

(4) Automatic Bypass

(5) Sensor Transmitters

(6) Sequence of Operation

b) References

(1) Hydraulic Institute

(2) ANSI – American National Standards Institute

(3) NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturers Association

(4) UL – Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

(5) NEC – National Electrical Code

(6) ISO – International Standards Organization

(7) IEC – International Electrotechnical Commission

c) Submittals

(1) Submittals shall include the following:

(i) System summary sheet

(ii) Sequence of operation

(iii) Shop drawing indicating dimensions, required clearances and location and size of each field connection.

(iv) Power and control wiring diagrams

(v) System profile analysis including variable speed pump curves and system curve the analysis shall also include pump, motor and AFD


13 of 19

efficiencies, job specific load profile, staging points, horsepower and kilowatt/hour consumption

(vi) Pump data sheets

(2) Submittals must be specific to this project Generic submittals will not be accepted.

d) Quality Assurance

(1) The pumping package shall be assembled by the pump manufacturer An assembler of pumping systems not actively engaged in the design and construction of centrifugal pumps shall not be considered a pump manufacturer The manufacturer shall assume “Unit Responsibility” for the complete pumping package. Unit responsibility shall defined as responsibility for interface and successful operation of all system components supplied by the pumping system manufacturer.

(2) The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years experience in the design and contruction of variable speed pumping systems

(3) All functions of the variable speed pump control system shall be tested at the factory prior to shipment. This test shall be conducted with motors connected to AFD output and it shall test all inputs, outputs and program execution specific to this application.

(4) The manufacturer shall be fully certified by the International Standards Organization per ISO 9001. Proof of this certification shall be furnished at the time of submittal.

(5) Manufacturer shall be listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories as a manufacturer of packaged pumping systems

(6) Bidders shall comply with all sections of this specification relating to packaged pumping systems Any deviations from this specification shall be bid as a voluntary alternate clearly defined in writing. If no exceptions are noted, the supplier or contractor shall be bound by these specifications

(7) Variable speed motors shall be inverter-duty motor and shall comply to NEMA MGI part 31 variable speed chines shall be with manual by pass for fixed speed operation incase.

e) Manufactured Units

(1) Furnish and install as shown on the plans a variable speed pumping system.

(2) The control system shall include, as a minimum, pump & motor assemblies, the programmable logic pump controller, adjustable frequency drive (s), automatic bypass, suction and discharge piping and additional equipment as specified or as required to properly execute the sequence of operation. Furnish field installed remote sensor/ transmitters as indicated on the plans.

(3) System shall require only suction and discharge connections and a single point power connection Field connection of remote sensor/transmitters and connection to Building Automation System shall be by controls contractor.

(4) All components shall be mounted on a structural steel base suitable for grouting. The base shall be large enough to support the system’s pumps,


14 of 19

piping and control panel. All welded pressure bearing piping must be fabricated with full penetration welds. Qualification of thew welding procedures and performance of the welders shall comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1 and ASME code, Section IX.

(5) Provide pumps as indicated on the pump schedule. Pumps and motors shall be furnished as specified in respective sections of this document

(6) Pressure gauges shall be furnished for system supply and return headers Gauges shall be installed to be clearly visible from front of control panel.

(7) Variable speed motors shall be inverter-duty motor and shall comply to NEMA MGI part 31. Variable speed drives shall be with manual by pass for fixed speed operation incase the VFD is not operating.

f) Components

a. Pump Logic Controller

(1) The Technologic pump logic controller assembly shall be listed by and bear the label of Underwriter’s Laboratory, Inc. (UL). The controller shall meet Part 15 of FCC regulations pertaining to class A computing devices. The controller shall be specifically designed for variable speed pumping applications

(2) The controller shall function to a proven program that safeguards against damaging hydraulic conditions including:

(i) motor overload

(ii) pump flow surges

(iii) hunting

(iv) end of curve

(3) the pump logic controller shall capable of accepting 8 analog inputs from zone sensor/transmitters indicated at various position of the piping network and as approved by the Engineer The controller shall scan each analog input a minimum of once every 500 milliseconds It will then select the analog signal that has deviated the greates amount from its setpoint This selected signal will be used as the command feedback input for a hydraulic stabilization function to minimize hunting. Each input signal shall be capable of maintaining a different set point value.

(4) The pump controller shall be capable of controlling all pumps in parallel

(5) The controller shall be fixed expandable to control up to 2 pumps in parallel and accept up 16 analog inputs. This modification shall consist of nothing more than the addition of analog input modules and shall not require the use of special tools or factory reprogramming Controllers not capable of being expanded to this level will not be acceptable


15 of 19

(6) The hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportional-integral-derivative control function. The proportional, integral and derivative values shall be user adjustable over an infinite range.

(7) The pump logic controller shall be self-prompting. All messages shall be displayed in plain English the operator interface shall have the following features:

(i) Multi-fault memory and recall

(ii) On-screen help functions

(iii) LED pilot lights and switches

(iv) Soft-touch membrane keypad switches.

(8) The readout shall be two lines of forty 0.50” brightly lit fluorescent characters capable of displaying the following values:

(i) Differential pressure in PSIG

(ii) Pressure in PSIG

(iii) Flow in GPM

(iv) Temperature in degrees F or c

(v) Differential temperature in degrees F or C

(vi) BTU calculation

(vii) Kilowatt consumption

(viii) Tons per jour calculation

(ix) Wire to water efficiency calculation

(9) The following communication features shall be provided to the BAS:

(i) Remote system start/ stop

(ii) Failure of any system component

(iii) Process variable

(iv) AFD speed

g) Adjustable Frequency Drive

(1) The adjustable frequency drive(s) shall be pulse width modulation (PWM) type, microprocessor controlled design

(2) The AFD, including all factory installed options, shall have CSA approval.

(3) Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 ventilated for installation as a wall mounted or free standing unit, depending on the amp rating A hand-off-automatic switch and speed potentiometer shall be mounted on the front of the enclosure.


16 of 19

(4) AFD shall utilize a diode bridge rectifier to convert three phase AC to a fixed DC voltage. Power Factor shall remain above 0.95 regardless of speed or load AFDs employing power factor correction capacitors shall not be acceptable.

(5) Insulated gate bipolar transistros shall be used in the inverter section to convert the fixed DC voltage to a three phase, adjustable frequency, AC output. A DC line reactor shall be provided to minimize harmonic and current distortion of the input power line.

(6) The following customer modifiable adjustments shall be provided:

(i) Accel time : 01 to 1800 seconds

(ii) Decel time : 01 to 1800 seconds

(iii) Minimum Frequency : 0 HZ

(iv) Maximum Frequency:100 HZ

(v) Analog input filter :01 to 10 seconds

(vi) Analog outputs: 10 to 1 gain

(vii) Volts/ Hertz ratio

(7) Speed reference signal shall be customer selectable for 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA.

(8) The AFD shall be suitable for elevations for 3300 feet above sea level without derating. Maximum operating ambient temperature shall not be less than 104 degrees F. AFD shall be suitable for operation in environments up to 95% non- condensing humidity.

(9) The AFD shall be capable of displaying the following information in plain English via a 40 character alphanumeric display:

(i) Frequency

(ii) Voltage

(iii) Current

(iv) Kilowatts per hour

(v) Fault identification

(vi) Percent torque

(vii) Percent power

(viii) RPM

(10) All AFDs shall be warranted for a period of 24 months after shipment. This warranty shall cover parts and labor.

Variable speed drives shall be with manual bypass for fixed speed operation in case the VFD is not operating.


17 of 19

h) Automatic AFD Bypass

(1) Variable speed pumping system shall be equipped with an automatic bypass.

(2) Bypass shall consist of a main power disconnect with ground fault protection, a pair of interlocked contractors and a motor overload relay. All are to be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure.

(3) Automatic bypass shall operate as described in the sequence of operation

i) Sensor/ Transmitters

Provide 1 field mounted differential pressure sensor transmitters as indicated on the plans. Unit shall transmit an isolated 4-20mA dc signal indicative of process variable to the pump logic controller via standard two wire 24 DC system. Unit shall have stainless steel wetted parts with two 0.25” male NPT process connections. It shall be protected against radio frequency interference and shall have a watertight, NEMA 4 electrical enclosure capable of withstanding 2000 PSI static pressure with a 0.5” NPT conduit connection Accuracy shall be within 0.25% of full span.

j) Sequence of Operation

(1) The system shall consist of a Technologic pump logic controller, multiple pump/AFD sets with manual and automatic alternation and pump staging with across the line bypasses for each pump.

(2) The pumping system shall start upon the closure of customer’s contact when the pump logic controller Mode of Operation selector switch is in the REMOTE position.

(3) When the pump logic controller selector switch is in the LOCAL position, the pumping system shall operate auto-matically.

(4) Sensor/transmitters shall be provided as indicated on the plans.

(5) Each sensor/transmitter shall send a 4-20mA signal to the pump logic controller, indicative of process variable condition.

(6) The pump logic controller shall compare each signal to the independent, engineer/user determined set points

(7) when all set points are satisfied by the process variable the pump speed shall remain constant at the optimum energy consumption level.

(8) the Technologic pump logic controller shall continuously scan and compare each process variable to its individual set point and control to the least satisfied zone.

(9) If the set point cannot be satisfied by the designated lead pump, the pump logic controller shall initiate a timed sequences of events to stage a lag pump.

(10) The lag pump shall accelerate resulting in the lead pump(s) decelerating until they equalize in speed.

(11) Further change in process variable shall cause the pumps to change speed together


18 of 19

(12) When the set point criteria can be safely satisfied with fewer pumps, the Technologic pump logic controller shall initiate a timed destage sequence and continue variable speed operation.

(13) As the worst case zone deviates from set point, the pump logic controller shall send the appropriate analog signal to the AFD to speed up or slow down the pump/motor.

(14) The operation of the pumps in the failure mode shall be started through the pump logic controller and an across the line bypass.

(15) When in the “AUTOMATIC” mode, the pump(s) shall operate through the AFD(s) being controlled by a signal generated by the pump logic controller

(16) In the event of a system differential pressure failure, due to a pump, AFD, overload fault, the Pump logic controller shall automatically initiate a timed sequence of events to start the remaining pump/AFD set(s) in the variable speed mode. A message on the display shall indicate the fault, pump/motor, or AFD. Subsequent failures shall initiate a timed sequence of events to the variable speed mode as available.

(17) In the event of all AFD faults, all pumps shall be auto-matically started across the line.

(18) When in the “BYPASS” mode, the selected pump(s) shall be able to be operated across the line at constant speed with motor overload protection. A solid red light shall signal this condition. All pumps shall be locked out of the variable speed mode.

(19) In the event of an overload fault while in the “BYPASS”

(20) In the event of the failure of a zone sensor/transmitter, its process variable signal shall be removed from the scan/compare program. Alternative zone sensor/transmitters, if available, shall remain in the scan/compare program for control.

(21) The zone number corresponding to the failed sensor/transmitter shall be displayed on the operation interface of the pump logic controller.

(22) In the event of failure to receive all zone process variable signals, the AFD shall maintain 100% speed, reset shall be automatic upon correction of the zone failure.

(23) PUMP, AFD, OVERLOAD fault shall be continuously scrolled through the display on the operator interface of pump logic controller until the fault has been corrected and the controller has been manually reset.


Chilled water pumps, expansion tanks, air separator, chilled water piping, valves and other piping accessories shall be either counted or measured in linear meters, actually installed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.


19 of 19




******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 - Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Unitary Air Conditioning (Split-Type) Systems

1 of 8

SECTION 15653 - UNITARY AIR CONDITIONING (SPLIT-TYPE) SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS


1.1.1 Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Publications: 210-81 Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment 260-75 Application, Installation and Servicing of Unitary Systems 410-72 Forced Circulation Air-cooling and Air-heating Coils 520-78 Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressor

and Condensing Units 1.1.2 Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA) Publications: 210-74 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating 99-83 Standard Handbooks 210-74 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating 1.1.3 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air- Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Inc.

Publications: 1983 Equipment, Handbook and Product Directory 1980 Systems, Handbook and Product Directory 15-78 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration 1.1.4 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications: A386-78 Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products B117-85 Salt Spray (Fog) Testing B209-83 Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

B280-83 Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service

F 872-84 Filter Units, Air Conditioning: Viscous-

Impingement Type Cleanable 1.1.5 National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) Publications: MG-1-1978 (Rev. 82) Motors and Generators ICS-1978 (Rev. 83) Industrial Controls, Devices, Controllers and Assembles


2 of 8

1.1.6 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications 70-81 National Electrical Code 90A-81 Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 1.1.7 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Publications

109-78 Tube Fittings for Flammable and Combustible Fluid Refrigeration Services and Marine Use

873-79 Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment 900-77 Air Filters 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements", with the following additions and

modifications, applies. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS The work includes the following:

a. Indoor and outdoor unit

b. Refrigerant piping and piping accessories

1.4 SUBMITTALS The Engineer shall submit all other items for approval. 1.4.1 Manufacturer's Data a. FCU (Wall Mounted Type)

b. ACCU

c. Refrigeration piping & accessories

1.4.2 Certified Test Reports a. Split type AC Unit

b. Fans/Blowers Data

1.4.3 Operation and Maintenance Manuals a. Split Type AC Unit 1.4.4 Posted Operating Instructions a. Unitary Air Conditioning System 1.4.5 Manufacturer's Recommended Procedures a. Installation, including evacuation and charging procedures b. Start-up and initial operation


3 of 8

1.4.6 Report of Start-Up and Initial Readings 1.5 CORROSION PREVENTION

Unless specified otherwise, equipment fabricated from ferrous metals that do not have a zinc coating conforming to ASTM A386 or a duplex coating of zinc and paint shall be treated for prevention of rust with a factory coating or paint system that will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test except that equipment located outdoors shall be tested for 500 hours. The salt spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117 using a 20 percent sodium chloride solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the coating shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling or cracking, no loss of adhesion, and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 3 mm on either side of the scratch mark. The film thickness of the factory coating or paint system applied on the equipment shall be not less than film thickness used on the test specimen.

1.6 SAFETY STANDARDS 1.6.1 Design, Manufacture and Installation of Mechanical Refrigeration Equipment ASHRAE 15-78 1.6.2 Machinery Guards

Fully guard drives mechanisms, or other moving parts in accordance with ANSI B15.1. Provide guards fabricated of steel and expanded metal, rigidly mounted, and readily removed without disassembly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

The air conditioning system shall be designed, constructed, and rating tested in accordance with ARI Standard 430.Units shall be ARI certified.

2.2 PERFORMANCE RATING

Cooling capacity of unit shall meet the total heat requirements indicated. Submittal shall include catalog selection data, which accounts for entering air conditions at evaporator, and condenser air conditions.

2.3 AIR CONDITIONERS, SPLIT TYPE

The air conditioning system shall consist of evaporator-blower unit and remote air-cooled condensing unit. The separate assemblies shall be design to be used together and ratings shall be based on the use of the matched assemblies. Provide performance diagrams for units with capacities not certified by ARI to demonstrate that the components of the air conditioning system furnished will satisfy the capacity requirement specified or indicated on the drawings. Performance factors (BTU/HR cooling/watt input) shall not be less than 8.0 when tested in accordance with ARI Standard 360. Submit data to demonstrate that the units will produce the performance factors specified.

2.3.1 Evaporator Fan

Fans shall conform to AMCA 210, and shall be forward curve centrifugal type specifically designed and suitable for the operating pressure. Fan for free blow type with variable speed and smaller cooling capacity shall be direct motor drive. Fan shaft shall not pass through their first critical speed when units come up to rated RPM. Units shall have either greasable or permanently lubricated ball or roller bearings. Fan assemblies shall be statically balanced in the fan housing and final assembly. Fan motors shall conform to NEMA MG-1.


4 of 8

2.3.2 Compressors

Provide hermetic type conforming to ARI 520, provided with all the minimum standard equipment and accessories listed therein. Compressors shall start unloaded. Provide compressor with devices to protect the compressor from short-cycling when shut-down by safety controls. Provide a pump-down cycle of the non-recycling start type for each compressor. Provide compressors with vibration isolators & crankcase heaters. Compressor motor shall be suitable for electric power characteristics as indicated. Motor shall conform to NEMA MG-1. Motor starters shall conform to NEMA ICS. Motors shall be constant speed, squirrel-cage induction, open type or hermetically sealed, low-starting current, high-torque type.

2.3.3 Coils

a. Cooling Coils

Direct Expansion Refrigerant Type with evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes designed for 1379 kPa (200 psi) and 104 degree C (220 0F). Provide drain pan under cooling coil, easily removable for cleaning with drain connection.

b. The air-cooled condenser coil shall be extended-surface fin-and-tube type with

seamless aluminum tubes and aluminum fins, on condensers with all aluminum construction, aluminum alloy conforming to ASTM B210, alloy 1100, shall be used for the tubes, and aluminum alloy conforming to chemical requirements of ASTM B209, alloy 7072, shall be used for fins and sheets. Fins shall be soldered or mechanically bonded to tubes and installed in a metal casing. Coils shall be air tested under water for leakage. After testing, dry coils for remote type units to remove free moisture, and cap to prevent entrance of foreign matter. Evacuate and seal coils at the factory.

2.3.4 Controls

a. Condenser Head Pressure Controls

Provide head pressure control to insure condensing temperature for proper system operation at all ambient temperatures down to 4.4C (40F).

Air Volume Control: Solid-state variable speed fan motor controller shall be provided to control air-flow over coil. Condensers with multiple fans may be provided with fan cycling control to cycle one of two fans, two of three fans, or four of six fans in response to outdoor ambient temperature. Control shall be set for a minimum of 95 degrees F saturated refrigerant condensing temperature.

b. Condenser Start-Up Control

Provide condenser with a start-up control package, which permits start-up of compressor regardless of low ambient temperatures. Package shall temporarily bypass system low pressure-start to permit start-up whenever minimum ambient temperature is below design evaporator coil suction temperature.

2.3.5 Refrigerant Circuits

Entire refrigerant circuit shall be dehydrated, purged, tested and holding charged with refrigerant at the factory. Field oil charge shall be the full amount required for operation.

2.3.6 Corrosion Protection

Units shall be factory corrosion protected in accordance with paragraph entitled, Corrosion Prevention.


5 of 8

2.3.7 Temperature Control

Temperature controls shall conform to standard comfort cooling condition of the offices, Arrival and Departure Halls and other conditioned spaces.

2.3.8 Fans

Statically and dynamically balanced, with air capacities horsepower, fan types, fan arrangement, and pressure ratings as indicated. Fan bearing life shall be minimum 200,000 hours at operating conditions. Provide guard (bird) screens for outdoor inlets and outlets. Equip with automatic back-draft damper where indicated. Housing and fan wheel shall be aluminum or steel.

2.4 WINDOW AIR CONDITIONERS

Units shall be removable from inside the building for servicing without removing the outside cabinet. Outside cabinet of the unit, including metal grille to protect the condenser coil shall be zinc-coated steel or aluminum. Steel and zinc-coated surfaces shall receive at least one coat or primer and manufacturer standard factory applied enamel. The cabinet or chassis shall be insulated to prevent dripping and running off of moisture. All mounting hardware shall be made of corrosion-resistant material or protected by a corrosion-resistant finish. Air filter shall be of permanent washable type easily removable without the use of tools and arranged to filter both room and ventilating air. Exhaust or fresh air intake shall be arranged so that it can take place simultaneously with cooling. Condensate shall be removed by means of drain or by evaporation and diffusion. Each unit shall be provided with metal or plastic mounting flanges on each side, top, and bottom of unit. Provide aluminum or shop painted zinc-coated steel flanged telescopic wall sleeve suitable for thru-the-wall installation of window model air conditioning units furnished. Wall sleeve shall be designed to restrict driving rain. Wall sleeve shall be mounted with means for vibration isolation. Minimum cooling capacity of each unit shall be not less than that indicated

2.4.1 Units for Operation on 208 or 230 Volts

Minimum EER shall be 0.8 Btu per hour output per watt input. Provide each unit with a 3-wire cord of manufacturer’s standard length. If not existing, provide a receptacle within reach of the standard length cord. Cord shall have 14-, 20-, or 30 amps. 3-pole, 250-volt ground type plug to match receptacle.

2.4.2 Controls

Manual and automatic controls shall be mounted in the cabinet and externally operable. Manual controls shall permit operation of either the fan or the fan refrigerating equipment. The fan control shall provide two fan speed settings. Automatic controls shall include a thermostat for controlling the air temperature. The thermostat shall have an adjustable range, including 22.22 degrees to 27 degrees C (72 degrees to 80 degrees F) and shall automatically turn the refrigeration system on or off to maintain the pre-selected temperature within plus or minus 4 degrees F.

2.5 CLEANING, PAINTING, AND IDENTIFICATION

Cleaning, painting, and identification of piping shall be as specified under Section 09910, "Painting of Building (Field Painting)".

2.6 IDENTIFICATION TAGS AND PLATES

Provide equipment, gages, thermometers, valves, and controllers with tags numbered and stamped for their use. Plates and tags shall be of brass or suitable nonferrous material, securely mounted or attached. Minimum letter and numeral size shall be 3 mm.


6 of 8


Application and installation practices for unitary air-conditioning systems shall conform to the requirements of ARI 260.

3.1.1 General

Install equipment and components in a manner to insure proper and sequential operation of the equipment and its control. Installation of equipment not covered herein or in the manufacturer's representative. Provide proper foundations for mounting of equipment, accessories, appurtenances, piping and controls including, but not limited to, supported vibration isolators, stands, guides, anchors, clamps and brackets. Foundations for equipment shall conform to equipment manufacturer's recommendation, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Set anchor bolts and sleeves accurately using properly constructed templates. Anchor bolts shall be of adequate length and provided with welded-on plates on the head end embedded in the concrete. Level equipment bases, using jacks or steel wedges, and neatly grouted-in with a non-shrinking type of mortar grout. Locate equipment so that working space is available for all necessary servicing such as shaft removal, disassembling compressor cylinders and pistons, replacing or adjusting drives, motors, or shaft seals, access to water valves and head of shell and tube equipment, tube cleaning or replacement, access to automatic controls, refrigerant charging, lubricator, oil draining and working clearance under overhead lines. Provide electric isolation between dissimilar metals for the purpose of minimizing galvanic corrosion.

3.1.2 Air Conditioning System

Install system as indicated, in accordance with the requirements of ASHRAE 15-78, and as recommended in the manufacturer's installation and operational instructions.

3.1.3 Electrical Work

Electric motor driven equipment specified herein shall be provided complete with motors, motor starters, and controls. Electrical equipment and wiring shall be provided with complete "Interior Wiring Systems". Motor starters shall be provided complete with properly sized thermal overload protection and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control specified. Provide manual or automatic control and protective devices required for the operation, herein specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices but not indicated.

3.1.4 Refrigerant Piping

Piping and fitting installation shall conform to the requirements of ASME B31.1. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the jobsite, and worked into place without springing or forcing, completely clearing all windows, doors, and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping installation will not be permitted without written approval. Pipe or tubing shall be cut square, shall have burrs removed by reaming, and shall permit free expansion and contraction without causing damage to the building structure, pipe, joints, or hangers. Changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 100 mm (4 inches) and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide weep bends are formed. Mitering or notching pipe or other similar construction to form elbows or tees will not be permitted. The centerline radius of bends shall not be less than 6 diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will not be accepted. Piping shall be installed 4 mm per m (1/2 inch per 10 feet) of pipe in the direction of flow to ensure adequate oil drainage. Open ends of refrigerant lines or equipment shall be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep moisture, dirt, or other foreign material out of the system. Piping shall remain capped until installation. Equipment piping shall be in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations and the contract drawings. Equipment and piping arrangements shall fit


7 of 8

into space allotted and allow adequate acceptable clearances for installation, replacement, entry, servicing, and maintenance.

3.1.5 Fans

Installation shall conform to NFPA 91, and SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, and SMACNA Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards. Provide mounting and supports for equipment and accessories, including structural supports, hangers, vibration isolators, stands, clamps and brackets, access doors, and dampers. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

a. Installation of Supports b. Selection

Selection of equipment support system shall take into account the best practice recommendations and requirements of SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, SMACNA Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards, and NEFA 91; location and precedence of work under other sections; interferences of various piping and electrical work; facility equipment; building configuration; structural and safety factor requirements; vibrations and imposed loads under normal and abnormal service conditions. Indicated support sizes, configurations, and spacing are the minimal type of supporting component required for normal loads. Where installed loads are excessive for the normal support spacing, provide heavier duty components or reduce the element spacing. After system start-up, replace or correct support elements, which vibrate and cause noise or possible fatigue failure. Exercise special care to prevent cascading failure.

3.2 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 3.2.1 Tests

All tests shall be performed and the Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment required for test. Tests after installation and prior to acceptance shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer and subject to his approval. Equipment and material certified as having been successfully tested by the manufacturer in accordance with referenced specifications and standards will not require retesting before installation. Equipment and materials not tested at the place of manufacturer will be tested before or after installation, as applicable, where necessary to determine compliance with referenced specifications and standards.

a. Leak Testing

Upon completion of installation of the air conditioning equipment, test all factories as well as field refrigerant piping with an electronic-type leak detector to acquire leak tight refrigerant systems. If leaks are detected at the time of installation or during the guarantee period, remove the entire refrigerant charge from the system, correct the leaks and retest the system.

b. Evacuation, Dehydration, and Charging

After system is found to be without leaks, evacuate the system using a reliable gage and a vacuum pump capable of pulling a vacuum of at least 1 mm Hg absolute. Evacuate system in strict accordance with the triple-evacuation and blotter method or in strict accordance with equipment manufacturer's printed instructions. System leak testing, evacuation, dehydration, and charging with refrigerant shall comply with the requirements contained in ARI Standard 260.


8 of 8

c. Start-Up and Operation Tests

Follow the manufacturer's start-up and initial operation procedures and place the system under all modes of operation to ensure that it is functioning correctly. Adjust safety and automatic control instruments as necessary to ensure proper operation and sequence. Initial operation period shall be not less than 8 hours.

d. Performance Tests

Upon completion of evacuation, charging, start-up, final leak testing, and proper adjustment of controls, the system shall be performance tested to demonstrate that it complies with the performance and capacity requirements of the specifications and plans. Test the system for not less than 8 hours, during which time hourly readings shall be recorder. At the end of the test period, the readings shall be averaged and the average shall be considered to be the system performance.


Indoor unit and outdoor unit, refrigerant piping and other piping accessories shall be either counted or measured in linear meters, actually installed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.




******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 - Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Air-Cooled Water Chillers

1 of 6

SECTION 15682 - AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

a. Chillers b. Charge of refrigerant and oil c. Controls and control connections d. Chilled water connections e. Starters f. Electrical power connections

1.2 SUBMITTALS

a. Submit drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loadings, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Indicate accessories where required for a complete system.

b. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories,

electrical requirements and wiring diagrams. c. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE

a. Submit operation data. b. Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, controls, and accessories. c. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

a. Conform to ANSI/ARI 590 or ANSI/ARI 550. b. Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 8 for construction and testing of water chillers. c. Conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 15 code for construction and operation of water chillers.

1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING

a. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units.

b. Protect units from physical damage. Factory coil shipping covers shall be kept in place

until installation.

c. Unit controls shall be capable of withstanding 203 degrees F (95 degrees C) storage temperatures in the control compartment for an indefinite period of time.

1.6 WARRANTY

a. Provide a full parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever comes first.


2 of 6

b. Provide five-year warranty for replacement compressors including materials and labor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PACKAGED AIR COOLED CHILLERS 2.1.1 General Unit Description

Provide factory assembled, designed and tested air-cooled liquid chillers consisting of helical rotary screw compressors, condenser, evaporator, thermal or electronic expansion valve, refrigeration accessories, starter, and control panel. Construction and ratings shall be in accordance with ANSI/ARI 550.

2.1.2 Compressors

a. Construct multiple rotary screw compressors with heat treated forged steel or ductile iron shafts, aluminum alloy connecting rods, automotive type pistons, rings to prevent gas leakage, discharge valves, and sealing surface immersed in oil. Rotors shall be of high-grade steel or cast iron alloy.

b. Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts. c. Provide oil lubrication system with oil charging valve and oil filter to

ensure adequate lubrication during starting, stopping, and normal operation. d. Provide compressor with automatic capacity reduction equipment consisting of suction

capacity control slide valve (rotary). Use lifting mechanism operating by oil pressure. Compressor must start unloaded for soft start on motors.

e. Provide constant speed 1800 rpm compressor motor, suction gas cooled with solid-

state sensor and electronic winding overheating protection, designed for across the line or star delta starting. Furnish with starter. Compressor motor power factor shall be .90 or greater. If the compressor motor power factor is less than 0.90, power factor correction capacitors must be installed.

f. Provide crankcase heater to evaporate refrigerant returning to crankcase during

shutdown. Energize heater when compressors is not operating. g. Refrigerants shall be ozone friendly of the HCFCs or the HFCs-134A type. CFCs will

not be accepted.

2.1.3 Evaporators

a. Provide shell and tube type evaporator, seamless or welded steel construction with cast iron or fabricated steel heads; seamless internally finned copper tubes, roller expanded into tube sheets. Copper tubes shall be removable from each end by removing cover plates or head.

b. Design, test, and stamp refrigerant side for 300 psig (2,068 kPa) working pressure and

water side for 25 psig (1,482 kPa) working pressure, in accordance with ANSI/ASME SEC 8.

c. Insulate with 0.75-inch (20 mm) minimum thick flexible elastomeric rubber closed cell

insulation with maximum K value of 0.26

d. Provide water drain connection, vent and fittings for factory installed leaving water temperature control and low temperature cutout sensors.


3 of 6

e. Water connection shall be victaulic. Evaporator shall have only one entering and one leaving connection. If manufacturer shall provide manifold and pressure gauges to ensure equal flow is provided to each evaporator.

2.1.4 Condenser

Extended-surface fin-and-tube type condenser construction. Condenser coils shall be constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins. Fins shall be hydraulically or mechanically bonded to tubes and installed in a metal casing. Coils shall be circuited and sized for a minimum of minus 15 degrees C (5 degrees F) sub-cooling and full pump down capacity. Provide a coating as specified in the paragraph entitled "Coatings for Finned Tube Coils." Coils to be coated shall be part of the manufacturer's standard product for the capacities and ratings indicated and specified. Fins shall be plate type.

2.1.5 Enclosures

a. House components in 12 gauges galvanized steel frame and mounted on welded structural steel base. Hot dip galvanized steel frame coating shall be UL recognized as G90-U, UL Guide No.DTHW2.

b. Unit panels and control panels shall be finished with a baked on powder plant. Control

panel doors shall have door stays. Paint system shall meet the requirements for outdoor equipment of federal government policies.

c. Provide factory mounted 4 inch square, heavy wire mesh access guards that covers

the service area beneath the condenser coils. d. Mount starters and disconnects in weatherproof panel provided with full access doors.

Provide lockable disconnect operating handle external to panel and clearly visible from outside of unit indicating if power is on or off.

e. Casings fabricated from steel that do not have a zinc coating conforming to ASTM

A123 or ASTM A525 shall be treated for the prevention of corrosion with a factory coating or paint system. The coating or paint system shall withstand 500 hours in a salt spray fog test in accordance with ASTM B117. Each specimen shall have a standard scribe mark as defined in ASTM D1654. Upon completion of exposure, the coating or paint system shall be evaluated and rated in accordance with procedures A and B of ASTM D1654. The rating of failure at the scribe mark shall not be less than six (average creepage not greater than 1/8 inch). The rating of unscribed area shall not be less than ten (no failure). Thickness of coating or paint system on the actual equipment shall be identical to that on the test specimens with respect to materials, conditions of application, and dry film thickness.

2.1.6 Refrigerant Circuit

a. All units shall have an independent refrigeration circuits, each with one compressor on each circuit.

b. Provide for each refrigerant circuit: (1) Liquid line shutoff valve. (2) Filter dryer (replaceable core type). (3) Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator.

(4) Electronic or thermal expansion valve sized for maximum operating pressure. (5) Charging valve.

(6) Discharge and oil line check valves. (7) Compressor suction and discharge service valves. (8) High side pressure relief valve. (9) Full operating charge service valves. (10) Unit factory leak tested at 200 psig.


4 of 6

c. Capacity Modulation: Provide capacity modulation by either slide valve or un-loader valves.

Unit shall be capable of operation down to 15 percent. In the event a manufacturer cannot provide unit with modulation down to 15 percent hot gas bypass must be provided.

2.1.7 Controls

a. On chiller, mount weatherproof control panel, containing starters, power and control wiring, molded case disconnect switch (UL approved) with external lockable operator handle, factory wired with terminal block power connection. Provide single point power connection on units with MCA less than 500 amps.

b. For each compressor, provide across-the-line starter on 460-volt applications. c. Provide the following safety controls with indicating lights or diagnostic readouts.

(1) Low chilled water temperature protection. (2) High refrigerant pressure. (3) Low oil flow protection. (4) Loss of chilled water flow. (5) Contact for remote emergency shutdown. (6) Loss of refrigerant charge protection. (7) Motor current overload. (8) Phase reversal/unbalance/single phasing. (9) Over/undue voltage. (10) Failure of water temperature sensor used by controller. (11) Compressor status (on or off).

d. Provide the following operating controls:

(1) Eight or more step leaving chilled water temperature controller which cycles

compressors and activates slide valve based on PI algorithms. If manufacturer is unable to prove at least eight steps unloading, providing hot gas bypass shall be required.

(2) A Five minute solid state anti-recycle timer to prevent compressor from short

cycling. If a greater than 5-minute solid-state anti-recycle timer is provided, hot gas bypass shall be provided to insure accurate temperature control in light load applications.

(3) Load limit thermostat to limit compressor loading on high return water

temperature to prevent nuisance trip out. (4) High ambient un-loader pressure stat unloads compressors to keep head

pressure under control and help prevent high pressure nuisance trip out on days when outside ambient is above design.

(5) Compressor current sensing un-loader unit that unloads to help prevent current

overload nuisance trip-out. (6) Auto lead-lag functions that constantly evens out running hours and

compressors starts automatically. If manufacturer can not provide this function then cycle counter and hour meter shall be provided for each compressor so Owner can be instructed by the Contractor on how to manually change lead-lag on compressors and even out compressor starts running hours.

(7) Condenser fan sequencing which automatically cycles fans in response to

ambient, condensing pressure and expansion valve pressure differential thereby optimizing unit efficiency.


5 of 6

e. Provide pre-piped gauge board with pressure gauges for suction and discharge refrigerant pressures on digital display of pressure on microprocessor.

f. Provide ammeters for each compressor or digital display of percent RLA on

microprocessor. g. Provide remote mounted alarm and display panel with a minimum of the following

features:

(1) Leaving chilled water temperature set-point adjustment. (2) Display diagnostic in 2.8 C. (3) Display entering and leaving water temperatures. (4) Display active chilled water and current limit set point. (5) Display ambient temperatures. (6) Display parts failures

(i) Water temperature and ambient temperature sensors (ii) Motor contactors (iii) Unit controller (iv) Condenser and evaporator refrigerant temperature sensors.

2.2 DDC SEQUENCING PANEL

a. General: A microprocessor based control panel shall provide chiller plant control. The control panel shall be factory programmed and require only minimal configuration at the job site. The chiller sequencing software shall incorporate the following features and strategies.

b. Piping System: The sequencing panel shall support single system pump.

c. System Enable: System start shall be initiated by a generic BAS System through the

closure of a set binary contact or by the operator from the DDC Sequencing panel key pad.

d. Set-point Control: The system chilled water set point shall be operator adjustable

through the panel keypad and display.

e. Chilled Water Reset: The sequencing panel software shall provide the option of either load based or ambient based chilled water reset.

f. Soft Loading: A soft loading function shall prevent start of a lag chiller during initial

chilled water loop pull-down for twice the normal delay.

g. Failure Recovery: On failure of the lead chiller, the lag chiller shall be enabled and remain enabled until the lead chiller is back on line.

h. User Interface: The user shall access the system through the panel keypad and display.

System security can be added to prevent unauthorized access to the panel control capabilities.

i. User Display/Adjustments: In addition to setup parameters, the user shall be able to

view and edit (if applicable) the following system information through the panel keypad and display:

(1) System supply water temperature (2) System returns water temperature (3) Active system set point (4) Chiller 1 status (Auto/Manual) (5) Chiller 2, 3, 4 Status (Auto/Manual) (6) System Enable (Auto/Stop)


6 of 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES

a. Supply service of factory-trained representative for a period of 5 days to supervise testing, startup, and instruction on operation and maintenance to Owner.

b. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil. c. Manufacturer to regularly inspect the installation and to check if the work related to the

chiller installation is in accordance to their recommended installation 4.0 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

Air cooled chillers shall be counted in sets actually installed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.


The quantities determined as provided in Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price, of the Pay Item listed below and shown in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Section.


******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 - Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Air Handling and Distribution Equipment

1 of 7

SECTION 15856 - AIR HANDLING AND DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS


1.1.1 Air-conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Publications 410-81 Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils 430-85 Central-Station Air Handling Units 440-84 Room Fan-Coil Air-Conditioners 880-83 Air Terminals 1.1.2 Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Publications 210-85 Laboratory Method of Testing Fans for Rating 220-82 Test Method for Air Curtain Units 1.1.3 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications A 123-84 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products B 117-85 Salt Spray (Fog) Testing 1.1.4 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Publications ICS 2-83 Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and

(Rev. 1-84) Assemblies

ICS 6-83 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems (Rev. 2-86) MG 1-78 Motors and Generators (Including Rev. 1 through Rev. 8) 1.1.5 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications 90A-85 Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 1.1.6 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Publications 883-80 Fan-Coil Units and Room Fan-Heater Units


2 of 7

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 15011, “Mechanical General Requirements,” applies to this section with the additions and modifications specified herein.

1.3 WORK INCLUDED a. Packaged Central station air handling units. b. Fan Coils c. Chilled Water Ceiling Cassette Units 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

a. Air Handling Units: Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of components who issues complete catalog data on total product offering.

b. Constant/Variable Air Volume Air Handling Units: Certify air volume, static pressure,

fan speed, brake horsepower and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 430. Manufacturer shall be responsible for expenses associated with testing of units after fabrication to verify capacities of fan(s).

c. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance

with ARI 410-87.

d. Chilled Water Ceiling Cassette Units: Certify capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410-87.

1.5 SUBMITTALS 1.5.1 Central station Air Handler, Fan Coil Units.

a. Submit as-built drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15011.

b. As-built drawings shall show total unit configuration in direction of airflow, unit dimensions, and field duct connection details.

c. Product data shall indicate dimensions, weights, coil performance, motor electrical

characteristics, and finishes of materials, filter media, filter sizes, and filter quantities.

d. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15011.

e. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. Fan curves shall indicate air volume, static pressure, fan speed and brake horsepower.

f. Submit sound power levels by octave band for air handling units at scheduled

design conditions. Provide sound power levels for "discharge" and "inlet plus cabinet" sound paths in accordance with AMCA 300 (or ASHRAE 68) and AMCA 301.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

a. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 15011.

b. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, belt tension adjustments, and wiring diagrams. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


3 of 7

a. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15011. Units shall ship fully

assembled on factory-installed base rails up to practical shipping and rigging limitations. Units not shipped fully assembled shall have tags and airflow arrows on each section to indicate location and orientation in direction of airflow. Each section shall have lifting lugs or shipping skid to allow for field rigging and final placement of section.

b. Units shall be cleaned and wrapped at the factory prior to shipment. Cleaning shall

consist of wiping the entire unit down with lint-free wipes using a solution of 80% de-ionized water and 20% isopropyl alcohol. After wipe down, the units shall be double-wrapped in polyethylene to minimize the potential for contamination while in transit or storage.

c. Deliver units to site with fan motors, sheaves, and belts completely assembled and

mounted in units. Mount motors as specified in Article 2.3 Paragraph D and Article 2.4 Paragraph A.

d. Store and protect products under provision of Section 15011.

e. Store wrapped units in clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction

traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated and fan has been test run under observation.

1.9 EXTRA STOCK

Provide two sets of disposable filters. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

Manufacturer must clearly define any exceptions made to Plans and Specifications. Manufacturer is responsible for expenses that occur due to exceptions made.

2.2 Central-Station Air Handlers

a. Fabricate draw-through type air-handling units with fan sections, coil sections, filter sections, and mixing box.

b. Factory fabricates air-handling units of sizes, capacities, and configurations as

scheduled on drawings. c. Provide factory-installed base rails to support all sections of units. Construct base

rails of minimum 10-gauge steel channels or I-beams. Base rail shall be chemically cleaned, coated with rust-inhibiting primer, and finished with epoxy paint.

2.2.1 Casing

a. Construct casings of minimum 16-gauge G90-u galvanized steel structural frames and minimum 50 mm (2-inches) thick double wall panels. Construct double wall panels of minimum 18-gauge epoxy-painted steel exterior panels and minimum 20-gauge steel interior panels or single wall panel of minimum 18 gauge epoxy-painted steel exterior panel as specified in the Equipment Schedule. In order to properly clean the interior of the air handler of particulate other debris, the casings shall be


4 of 7

constructed such that structural frames are free standing and wall panels are non-load bearing. Contractor shall be responsible to provide connection flanges and all other framework that is needed on unit to ensure that removal of wall panels shall not affect structural integrity of unit.

b. Construct casing sections located upstream of supply fan for operation at 4 inches

water gage negative static pressure and casing sections located downstream of supply fan for operation at 6 inches water gage positive static pressure. Seal joints between casing sections with closed-cell foam gasketing for leak seal and thermal and acoustical break. All joints shall be caulked on both the interior and exterior.

c. Panels shall be fully removable to allow for a proper way to thoroughly clean panels

and to access internal parts. Secure panels to structural frames with stainless steel screws. Seal joints between exterior panels and structural frames with closed-cell foam gasketing for leak seal and thermal and acoustical break. All joints shall be caulked on both the interior and exterior.

d. Casings shall have removable access panels or doors as scheduled on drawings.

Construct access doors on minimum 18-gauge, epoxy-painted steel exterior panels and minimum 22-gauge epoxy-painted steel interior panels. Provide automotive style neoprene gasketing around full perimeter of access doors to prevent air leakage. Provide "ventlock" style non-corrosive alloy latches operable from the inside or outside of unit. If access doors do not open against unit operating pressure, provide safety latches that allow access doors to partially open after first handle movement and fully open after second handle movement. Insulate access doors with 1-inch thick 1-½ pound per cubic foot density matt-faced fiberglass insulation.

e. Panels shall be fully removable to allow for a proper way to thoroughly clean panels

and to access internal parts. Secure panels to structural frames with stainless steel screws. Seal joints between exterior panels and structural frames with closed-cell foam gasketing for leak seal and thermal and acoustical break. All joints shall be caulked on both the interior and exterior.

f. Casing shall have removable access panels or doors as scheduled on drawings.

Construct access doors on minimum 18-gauge, epoxy painted steel exterior and minimum 22-gauge epoxy painted steel interior panels. Provide automotive type neoprene gasketing around full perimeter of access doors to prevent air leakage. Provide "ventlock" style non-corrosive alloy latches operable from the inside or outside of unit. If access doors do not open against unit operating pressure, provide safety latches that allow access doors to partially open after first handle movement and fully open after second handle movement. Insulate access doors with 2-inch thick, 1-½ pound per cubic foot density matt-faced fiberglass insulation.

g. Insulate casing sections with 1-inch thick, 1-½ pound per cubic foot density matt-

faced fiberglass insulation. Provide double wall casing construction and encase insulation between exterior and interior casing panels such that no insulation is exposed to airstreams. Foil facing on insulation is not acceptable as alternate to double wall construction. Insulate all structural channels connected to casing panels and cover openings in structural channels with epoxy painted steel. Insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A. Insulation for single wall casing shall be the same as in double wall casing however exposed face of insulation shall be applied with neoprene coating suitable for this application.

h. Insulate fan sections and discharge plenums with 1-inch thick, 1-½ pound per cubic

foot density matt-faced fiberglass insulation. Provide double wall casing construction and encase insulation between exterior and interior casing panels such that no insulation is exposed to air stream. Foil facing on insulation is not acceptable as alternate to double wall construction. Insulate all structural channels connected to


5 of 7

casing panels and cover openings in structural channels with epoxy painted steel. Insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A.

i. Provide sealed double wall drain pass constructed of minimum 18-gauge epoxy

painted exterior pans and minimum 18-gauge 304 stainless steel interior panels. Encase manufacturer's standard insulation between exterior and interior panels. Drain pans shall be sloped in 2 planes; cross break interior pans and pitch toward drain connections to ensure complete condensate drainage. Units with cooling coils shall have drains pans under complete cooling coil section. All drain pan connections will be to the side of the unit.

2.2.2 Fans

a. Provide supply fan section(s) with BI or AF double width, double inlet centrifugal fan designed and suitable for class of service indicated in the unit schedule. Fan shaft to be properly sized and protectively coated with a thin coat of epoxy paint applied after shaft installation. Fan shafts shall be solid and properly designed so that fan shaft does not pass through first critical speed as unit comes up to rated RPM. Fans shall be statically and dynamically tested as an assembly at the required RPM to meet design specifications. Key fan wheels to fan shaft to prevent slipping.

b. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated pillow-block ball bearings selected for L-10;

200,000-hour minimum life per ANSI/AFBMA 9. Extend grease lubrication fittings to drive side of unit with stainless steel tubes and Zerk fittings rigidly attached to casing.

c. Mount fans on minimum 16-gage epoxy painted steel isolation bases. Internally

mount motors on same isolation bases and internally isolate fans with 2-inch housed spring seismic isolators. Install flexible ducts of heavy glass fabric double-coated between fan and casings to ensure proper isolation and prevent vibration and noise from being transmitted through the unit. Flexible ducts shall comply with NFPA 90A.

d. Fan sections shall have full height, double wall, hinged, removable access doors on

both sides for inspection and maintenance of internal components. Construct doors in accordance with Article 2.2 Paragraph D. To facilitate inspection of internal components, provide 8- by 10-inch sealed glass and wire view windows on access doors and provide marine lights inside fan sections. Construct marine lights of sealed glass fixtures with wire guards to keep electrical sockets dry and protect fixtures from damage.

e. Statically and dynamically balance fan section assemblies. Fan section assemblies

include fan wheels, shafts, bearings, drives, belts, isolation bases and isolators. Allow isolators to free float when performing fan balance. Measure vibration at each fan shaft bearing in horizontal, vertical and axial directions.

2.2.3 Motor and Drives

a. Factory installs all motors on slide base to permit adjustment to belt tension.

b. Fan motors shall be heavy duty, high efficiency TEFC, operable at 460 volts, 60 Hz, 3-phase.

c. V-belt drive shall be constant pitch rated at 1.2 times the motor nameplate.


6 of 7

2.2.4 Coils

a. Coils shall be manufactured by the same company as the supplier of the air handling unit. Install coils such that headers and return bends are enclosed by unit casings.

b. Construct coils of configuration plate fins and seamless tubes. Fins shall have collar

drawn, belled and firmly bonded to tubes by means of mechanical expansion of tubes. Do not use soldering or tinning in bonding process.

c. Construct coil casings of minimum 16-gauge stainless steel with formed end

supports and top and bottom channels. If two or more coils are stacked in unit, install intermediate drain channels between coils to drain condensate to main drain pans without flooding lower coils or passing condensate through air stream.

2.2.5 Filters

a. Provide factory-fabricated filter section of the same construction and finish as unit casings. Filter sections shall have filter guides and full height, double wall, hinged, removable access doors for filter removal. Construct doors in accordance with Article 2.2 Paragraph D. Filter sections shall flange to other unit components. Provide filter block-offs as required to prevent air bypass around filters.

b. Provide 4-inch flat filter sections with maximum face velocity of 550 feet per minute with disposable filters. Filters shall be coated with an anti-microbial coating to prevent microbes from growing in the filters. Filters shall be removable from both side(s) of filter sections.

c. Provide high-efficiency filter sections as indicated on plans with maximum face velocity of 550 feet per minute with cartridge filters and disposable panel pre-filters. High efficiency filters shall be efficient with rated in accordance with ASHRAE 52 and UL Class 1 or Class 2. Filters shall be coated with an anti-microbial coating to prevent microbes from growing in the filters. Filters shall be removable from both sides of filter sections.

2.2.6 Mixing Box

Include equally sized openings, sized to handle full air capacity. Provide manual dampers as indicated.

2.3 CHILLED WATER CEILING CASSETTE UNIT

Cassette unit shall be design for air-foil blade centrifugal fan, high efficiency, quiet, and four way air distribution pattern. Return air enters the cassette unit through a large grille, cleaned by an easily removable and washable filter. The unit shall be equipped with an automatic condensate drain pump.

2.4 DUCTWORK SECTION 15895, “Ductwork and Ductwork Accessories” 2.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Section 15971, “Space Temperature Control Systems.” PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION


7 of 7

Install air distribution equipment as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Provide clearance for inspection, repair, replacement, and service. Electrical work shall conform to NFPA 70 and Division 16, “Electrical”. Provide overload protection in the operating disconnect switches and magnetic starters.

3.2 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTS

Schedule and administer the specified tests. Provide personnel, instruments, and equipment for such tests. Correct defects and repeat the respective inspection and tests. Give the Engineer ample notice of the dates and times scheduled for tests and trial operations. Conduct inspection and testing in the presence of the Engineer and Owner’s representative.

3.2.1 Field Inspection

Prior to initial operation, inspect equipment installation for conformance with drawings and specifications.

3.2.2 Field Tests 3.2.2.1 Preliminary Tests

For each item of air handling and distribution equipment and its components, perform an operational test for a minimum period of 8 hours.

3.2.2.2 Testing and Balancing

After preliminary tests, test, adjust, and balance the air handling and distribution equipment in accordance with Section 15895, “Ductwork and Ductwork Accessories” 15996, “Testing and Balancing Air and Water Systems”.


Air handling units and chilled water type ceiling cassette fan coil units shall be counted by the actual sets installed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.




******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 – Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Industrial Ventilation and Exhaust Systems

(Fans & Blowers)

1 of 9

SECTION 15871- VENTILATION AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS (FANS & BLOWERS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

The latest editions of the publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced to in the text by the basic designation only.

1.1.1 US Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

Standards 1.1.2 Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA) Publications: 99 Standards Handbook 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating 1.1.3 American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) Manual Industrial

Ventilation A Manual of Recommended Practice 1.1.4 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications Z49.1-83 Safety in Welding and Cutting 1.1.5 American Welding Society (AWS) Publications D1.1 Structural Welding Code, Steel D1.3-81 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel 1.1.6 National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Publications

ICS 2 – 1983 Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assembles (Rev 1-3) ICS 6-1983 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and System

MG 1-78 Motors and Generators R 1981 Rev. 1-8

1.1.7 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications

91.83 Installation of Blower and Exhaust System for dust, stock, and vapor removal or conveying

1.1.8 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) Publications 1975-1 Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct Construction 1977 (Rev. A) High Pressure Duct Construction Standards. 1980-3 Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards 1977-2 Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards


(Fans & Blowers)

2 of 9

1.1.9 Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Specifications SP 5-85 White Metal Blast Cleaning PA 2-82 Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages

1.1.10 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Publications 555-79 Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers Building Materials Directory

705-79 Power Roof Ventilator 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements" applies to this section with the modifications specified herein.

1.2.1 Submittals 1.2.2 Shop Drawing a. Fan installation drawings

b. Duct systems

c. Support and anchor location, field-fabricated roof curbs, load imposed and structural

design calculations.

1.2.3 Manufacturer's Data and Shop Drawings

Submit manufacturer’s brochures and layout drawings for approval before delivery of materials and equipment. They shall contain enough detailed information to determine that the equipment conforms with the requirements of the Specification:

a. Fans including fan curves or rating tables, derating factors, and temperature ratings

b. Sleeve bearing data

c. Supports and hangers

d. Vibration isolators

1.2.4 Procedures a. Welding b. Testing agenda

c. Testing procedures

1.2.5 Certified Test Reports a. Fan data, including sound power level data

b. System test reports

1.2.6 Performance Curves for Fans

Submit certified performance curves including maximum and minimum settings. Indicate power, mechanical efficiency, static pressure, and total pressure plotted against flow rate in m³/hr, cmh (ft³/min., cfm).


(Fans & Blowers)

3 of 9

1.2.7 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Furnish three complete sets of bound operating and maintenance instructions specifically for this installation. Operating portion shall be bound separately from Maintenance portion. Explain in detail any component or method peculiar to a particular system. Furnish one complete manual prior to the time that the equipment tests are performed. Provide a table of contents. Instruction sheets shall be legible and easily understood, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manual shall be complete for all equipment, accessories, and appurtenances stipulated. Include as a minimum the following:

a. System layouts showing machinery and controls

b. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation of each component

c. Control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown

d. Installation instructions

e. Safety precautions, trouble-shooting diagrams, and illustrations

f. Test procedures

g. Performance data

h. Parts lists, with manufacturers’ names and catalog numbers

i. Preventive maintenance schedules

j. Service organizations with names, addresses, and telephone numbers

1.2.8 Posted Operating Instructions Shall be provided at the time of final inspection and acceptance 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS 1.3.1 Qualification of Welders

The quality of welding and welding procedures shall be determined by testing the welders’ ability to make sound welds under standard working conditions, with the equipment to be used on the project, and in conformance with AWS D1.1. Submit certified copies of the qualifications of the welders employed on the contract. The Project Engineer shall be notified 24 hours in advance as to the time and place the tests will be conducted. Whenever practical, the tests shall be performed at the work site. The Project Engineer shall be furnished with a listing of the names and symbols to be used to identify the work performed by the welder or welding operator who, after completing a welded joint, shall identify it as his work by applying his assigned symbol for a permanent record. Welders who make acceptable procedure qualification test welds will be considered performance-qualified for the welding procedure used. Welders making defective welds during the qualification tests and welders responsible for making defective welds after passing the test shall be given a re-qualification test. Reassign a welder who fails a re-qualification test.

1.4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1.4.1 Guards and Screens

Provide metal personnel safety guards for fans mounted within 2.1 m (7 ft) of occupied space and/or otherwise normally accessible unducted fan inlets and discharges and moving power transmission components in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.219. Construct guards and screens to provide, as applicable: required strength and clearance with minimal reduction in free area at fan inlets and discharges; cooling; access panels and tachometer readings; ease of sectional disassembly for maintenance and inspection functions where guard total weight exceeds 23 kg (50 lb.); weather protection where components are weather-exposed. Installed guards and screens shall not negate noise control and vibration isolation provisions.


(Fans & Blowers)

4 of 9

Fan RPM should not exceed that recommended in performance tables.

Insulate surfaces with service temperatures in excess of 60°C (140°F) and accessible to personnel from normal operating or maintenance location for burn protection as part of work under Section 15250, "Insulation of Mechanical Systems".

1.4.2 Welding Conform to ANSI Z49.1 for safety in welding and cutting. Part 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FANS

Statically and dynamically balanced; overall run-out shall not be greater than 1.6 mm (0.0625 in.). Fan types, arrangements, air-moving capacities and pressure ratings as indicated on the equipment schedule. Fans shall be AMCA certified. Fan performances indicated on the drawings shall be minimums.

Fan bearing life shall be minimum 200,000 hours (L50) at operating conditions. Fans shall be equipped with gravity back-draft dampers or electric motorized dampers where indicated; multidirectional vibration isolators to relieve vibration transmission from the unit; corrosion-resistant screens to exclude birds, debris, or insects. V-belt drives shall be factory preset to the specified rpm. Pulleys shall be sized for at least 150% of driven horsepower.

Fans shall have thermal overload protection in the operating disconnect switches within the building.

2.1.1 Centrifugal In-line Fans

AMCA “B” construction: The fan shall have a non-ferrous impeller and non-ferrous ring about the opening through which the shaft passes. Ferrous hubs, shafts, and hardware are allowed provided construction is such that a shift in impeller or shaft will not permit two ferrous parts of the fan to rub or strike. Direct - or belt-driven; non-overloading, backward-curved blower wheels; deep spun venturi; galvanized- or painted steel frame and casing. Electric motor shall be isolated from air stream. Shall have removable, gasketed, panels for access to interior. Provide hanger-type isolators with brackets for overhead installation on structural members; flexible neoprene shear pads or rubber isolators with support channels for floor installation.

2.1.2 Centrifugal Roof Exhauster

Heavy gauge aluminum hoods die-formed for uniformity, with a rolled bead for improved strength, can be easily removed for access to motor compartment. Fan and motor. Combinations are individually tested to insure the balance of motor capacity to fan’s requirements, insuring proper motor loading for longer life. Backward curved non-overloading aluminum airfoil impeller is statically and dynamically balanced for smooth, vibration free performance. The following accessories shall be provided by the fan manufacturer; bird screen made of 13 mm x 13 mm hardware cloth; un-fused safety disconnect switches; Internal wiring between motor and disconnect; gravity back draft dampers and factory fabricated roof curb.

2.1.3 Supply Fans

Centrifugal in-line supply fan, backward inclined, non-overloading fan complete with filter and TEFC motor. Motor can be serviced without disturbing the inlet/discharge duct connection. Access doors shall be provided to allow servicing of wheel, bearings, shaft and drive components.


(Fans & Blowers)

5 of 9

2.2 DUCT WORKS Section 15895, "Ductwork and Ductwork Accessories." 2.2.1 Motors and Motor Starters Refer to electrical drawings.

2.2.2 Wall-Mounted Exhaust Fans

Sidewall direct driven propeller fan with backdraft damper, ODP motor and rain hood. Provide connection of permanent wiring. Refer to equipment schedule for the airflow capacity and electrical data.

Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.1.1 Installation Requirements

Installation shall conform to NFPA 91, and SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards, and SMACNA Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards. Provide mounting and supports for equipment, ductwork, and accessories, including structural supports, hangers, vibration isolators, stands, clamps and brackets, access doors, blast gates, and dampers. Install accessories in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions. Positive pressure duct inside buildings shall be constructed airtight.

Steps shall be taken to insure that the impeller, bearings, and shaft are adequately attached and/or restrained to prevent a lateral or axial shift in these components.

3.1.2 Electrical Ground Continuity

Where electrical ground continuity is required, provide brazed connection insulated, multi-strand, copper wire jumpers across points of discontinuity. Connection to ground and continuity testing shall be provided as part of the work of Division 16.

3.1.3 Special Installation Requirements for Productivity Coated Steel Ductwork for Corrosive Fume

and Vapor Exhaust

Slope horizontal ducts flow or in the direction of air flow or in the direction opposite to airflow. Where necessary, slope duct to common drainage point. Provide drains at low points, at internal duct restrictions, as base of risers and where indicated.

3.1.4 Building Penetrations 3.1.4.1 General Penetration Requirements

Provide properly sized, fabricated, located, and trade coordinated sleeves and prepared openings, for duct mains, branches, and other item penetrations, during the construction of the surface to be penetrated. Provide sleeves for round duct and items 381 mm (15 inches) and smaller and prepared openings for round duct larger than 381 mm (15 inches) and square or rectangular duct. Sleeves, except as otherwise specified or indicated, shall be 20-gauge, 0.0396-inch (one-mm) thick mill galvanized sheet metal. Sleeves penetrating load-bearing surfaces shall be standard weight galvanized steel pipe. Provide roof penetrations as shown in SMACNA Accepted Industry Practice for Industrial Duct Construction.

3.1.4.2 Framed Opening

Provide framed openings in accordance with approved shop drawings. Refer to paragraph entitled "Fire Dampers," in this section, for related work.


(Fans & Blowers)

6 of 9

3.1.4.3 Clearances

Provide a minimum 25.4 mm (one inch) clearance between penetrating and penetrated surfaces. Fill clearance space with bulk fibrous glass or mineral wool and seal and close.

3.1.4.4 Tightness

Penetration shall be weather-tight, fireproof where fire rated surfaces are penetrated, vapor-tight to prevent vapor transmission to conditioned spaces, sound-tight to prevent vapor transmission normally occupied or finished spaces, flammable substances or gases could migrated.

3.1.4.5 Sealants

Sealant shall be elastomeric type. Apply to oil free surfaces to a minimum 10 mm (3/8 inch) depth.

3.1.4.6 Closure Collars

Provide a minimum 102 mm (4 inches) wide, unless otherwise indicated, for exposed ducts and items on each side of penetrated surface, except where equipment is installed. Install collar tight against the surface and fit snugly around penetrating item without contact. Sharp edges shall be ground smooth to prevent damage to penetrating surface. Collars for round ducts 381 mm (15 inches) in diameter or less shall be fabricated from 20-gauge, (0.0396-inch) one-mm nominal thickness, mill galvanized steel. Use a minimum of 4 fasteners to attach collars where the opening is 305 mm (12 inches) in diameter or less, a minimum of 8 fasteners where the opening is 508 mm (20 inches) in diameter or less. Fabricate collars for square and rectangular ducts with a maximum size of 381 mm (25 inches) or less from 20-gauge, (0.0396-inch) one-mm nominal thickness, and mill-galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for round, square, and rectangular ducts with minimum dimension over 381 mm (15 inches) from 28-gauge, (0.0516 inch) 1.3 mm in nominal thickness, mill galvanized steel. Install collars with fasteners a maximum of 152 mm (6 inches) on center.

3.1.5 Installation of Flexible Connectors

Flexibly connect duct and vibration isolated fans and specified components. When fans are started, stopped, or operating, flexible connector surfaces shall be curvilinear, free of stress induced by misalignment or fan reaction forces, and shall not transmit vibration. Leakage shall not be perceptible to the hand when place within 152 mm (6 inches) of the flexible connector surface or joint. Provide a minimum of 152 mm (6 inches) and a maximum of (2 feet) 0.6 m active length with a minimum of 25 mm (one inch) of slack, secured at each end by folding in to 24-gauge sheet metal or by metal collar framed.

3.1.6 Installation of Supports 3.1.6.1 Selection

Selection of duct and equipment support system shall take into account the best practice recommendations and requirements of SMACNA Industrial Duct Construction Standards, and NFPA 91; location and precedence of work under other sections; interferences of various piping and electrical work; facility equipment; building configuration; structural and safety factor requirements; vibration and imposed loads under normal and abnormal service conditions. Indicated support sizes, configurations, and spacing are the minimal type of supporting component required for normal loads. Where installed loads are excessive for the normal support spacing, provide heavier duty components or reduce the element spacing. After system start-up, replace or correct support elements, which vibrate and cause noise or possible fatigue failure. Exercise special care to prevent cascading failure.


(Fans & Blowers)

7 of 9

3.1.6.2 General Requirements for Supports

Securely attach supporting elements to building structural steel or structural slabs. Where supports are required between building structural members provide supplementary structural steel as specified for work under this section. On submittals, show location of supports and anchors and loads imposed on each point of support or anchor. Do not hang equipment from piping other equipment. Attach supports only to structural framing member and concrete slab. Do not anchor supports to metal decking unless a means is provided and approved for preventing the anchor from puncturing the metal decking. Where supports are required between structural framing members, provide suitable intermediate metal framing. Where C-clamps are used, provide retainer clips. A maximum span of 3 m (10 ft) shall exist between any two points, with lesser spans as specified or as required by duct assemblies, interferences, and loads imposed or permitted. Provide a minimum one set of two vertical support elements for each point of support and each length of duct, except as otherwise specified. Install supports on both sides of all duct turns, branch fittings, and transitions. Cross-brace hangers sufficiently to eliminate sway. Perforated straphangers are prohibited. Where ductwork system contains heavy equipment, hang such equipment independently of the ductwork. Duct support shall be vibration isolated from structure at point indicated. Provide vibration isolators in indicated discharge ducting system for a minimum distance of 50 m (164 feet) beyond the fan. Coordinate deflection of equipment mountings and conform to Section 15200, "Noise, Vibration, and Control". The location of supporting elements shall be limited by the allowable load on the purlin which shall be limited so that no greater than the moment produced by one Kip load at mid-span of purlin. When the hanger load exceeds these limits, provide reinforcing of purlins or additional support beams. When an additional beam is used, the beam shall bear on the top chord of the roof trusses and bearing shall be over gusset plats of top chord. Stabilize beam by connection to roof purlin along bottom flange.

3.1.6.3 Methods of Attachment

Attachment to building structural steel shall be by bolting or by welding, in accordance with AWA D1.1. Masonry anchors selected for overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only. Install masonry anchors in rotary, non-percussion, and electric drilled holes. Self-drilling anchors may be used provided masonry drilling is performed with electric hammers selected and applied in such a manner as to prevent concrete spalling or cracking. Pneumatic tools are prohibited.

3.1.7 Welding

Welding shall be done in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3.

3.1.8 Test Ports

Provide test access ports at points required for work under paragraph 3.2, "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing", in this section. Locate test ports in straight duct as far as practical downstream of fans, change of direction fittings, takeoffs, interior to duct accessories, and like turbulent flow area.

3.1.9 Protective Coating Work 3.1.9.1 General Requirements for Protective Coating Work

Provide protective coating on exterior surfaces of ducts and surfaces of equipment with system as specified hereafter. Prime coat exterior surfaces of ducts and equipment with inorganic zinc coating as part of work under this section. Brush primer or protective coating where no primer is specified, onto corners and into crevices and welds, working the material into irregular surfaces for a holiday free finish.


(Fans & Blowers)

8 of 9

3.1.9.2 Inorganic Zinc Coating System 3.1.9.2.1 General Requirements, Inorganic Zinc Coating System

The following shall govern for a protective coating system primer based on inorganic zinc coating intended for shop application to specified black carbon steel surfaces with subsequent field finishing with compatible tie coat and modified acrylic top coat.

3.1.9.2.3 Surface Preparation SSPC SP 5 3.1.9.2.4 Application

Apply one coat at 2 to 3 mils (51 to 76 microns) dry film thickness by airless or conventional spray equipment. Use only those thinners and cleaners in amount recommended by the manufacturer.

3.1.9.2.4 Repair Field repair damaged surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.1.9.3 Field Inspection of Protective Coating Work

Visually inspect coated surfaces from a maximum distance of (5 feet) 1.5 m with special attention given to corners and crevices. Check coating thickness in accordance with SSPC PA 2. Perform inspection immediately prior to erection of ductwork and equipment and in the presence of the Contracting Engineer. Repair coating as required. Apply additional coating if thickness is not sufficient.

3.1.10 Factory and Field Painting and Finishing 3.1.10.1 Factory Work

Factory finish interior ferrous metal and other specified metallic equipment and component surfaces with manufacturer's standard surface preparation, primer, and finish coating. Factory finish exterior to building space ferrous metal surfaces and other exterior to building and interior to building metallic or nonmetallic surfaces with specified protective coating system in accordance with the paragraph entitled "Protective Coating Material", in this section and otherwise with manufacturer's standard surface preparation, primer and finish which meet the requirements of paragraph entitled "Corrosion Prevention."

3.1.10.2 Field Work

Touch-up or if necessary, repaint factory applied finishes which are marred, damaged, or degraded during shipping, storage, handling, or installation to match the original finish. Field or shop fabricated ferrous metals required for installation specified under this section shall be cleaned and primed. Painting of surfaces not otherwise specified and finish painting of items primed at the factory or elsewhere, are specified as part of the work.

3.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

Testing, adjusting and balancing shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 15996. 3.3 SYSTEM OPERATION DEMONSTRATION

After systems and equipment testing, adjusting, and balancing has been completed and accepted, demonstrate the complete and correct functioning of systems equipment and controls by operation through normal ranges and sequences, and by simulation of abnormal conditions, including the manual tripping of fire dampers. Manually and automatically cause every device


(Fans & Blowers)

9 of 9

to function as intended. Readjust, as necessary, any settings and after sufficient operating time, but not less than 6 hours, verify ability of equipment and controls to establish and maintain stable and accurate operation and required system performance. Note any abnormal deviations, such as excessive vibration, noise, and head, binding damper mechanisms, and incorrect fan rotation. Make any necessary repairs, replacements or adjustments.


Exhaust fans, exhaust air duct and exhaust pipe support shall be either counted or measured in linear meters, actually installed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.




******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 – Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Ductwork and Ductwork Accessories

1 of 10

SECTION 15895 - DUCTWORK AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES Part 1 - GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

The latest edition of publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1.1.1 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA) Publications HVACDCS HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible HVACTAB HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing HVACALTM HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual 1.1.2 Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Publications ADC 1062R4 Air Diffusing Equipment Certification, Rating, and Test Material

ADC-63 Measurement of Room-to-Room Sound Transmission through Plenum Air Systems

1.1.3 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

Publication

ASTM A 123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A 167 Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip

ASTM A 527 / A 527M Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock- Forming Quality

ASTM B 117 Salt Spray (Fog) Testing ASTM C 553 Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation (Industrial Type)

ASTM D 1654 Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments

ASTM E 96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

ASTM E 437 Specification for Industrial Wire Cloth and Screens (Square Opening Series)

1.1.4 Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA) Publication AMCA 500 Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters 1.1.5 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publication NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements," applies to this section with the additions and modifications specified herein.


2 of 10

1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.3.1 Shop Drawings

Submit shop-drawing showing the general arrangement of equipment, duct connections, hangers and others. Indicate also the equipment/duct sizes including control distances.

1.3.2 Manufacturer's Data

a. Dampers

b. Duct Connectors

c. Flexible Ducts and Connectors

d. Insulation and Vapor Barrier

e. Louvers

f. Air Filters

g. Eliminators

h. Drip Pans

i. Insect Screens

j. Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles

k. Sheet Metals

l. Test Holes

m. Acoustic Duct Liner

n. Variable Air Volume Boxes

1.3.3 Certificates of Conformance

a. Fire Dampers and Automatic Dampers 1.3.4 Certified Test Reports

a. Automatic Dampers. Submit certification of damper leakage testing and conformance with AMCA 500 and specified maximum leakage or pressure drop requirements.

b. Corrosion Protection

1.3.5 Field Test Reports 1.3.6 SMACNA Duct Construction Manuals

The SMACNA recommendations shall be considered as mandatory requirements. Substitute the word "shall" for the word "should" in these manuals. No negative pressure construction for 100-mm (4-inch), 150-mm (6-inch), or 250-mm (10-inch) water gauge is provided herein.

1.3.7 Pressure -Velocity Qualification Conforms to SMACNA HVACDCS Section I, “Basic Duct Construction”. 1.4 TESTING FOR CORROSION PROTECTION

Comply with ASTM A 123 or protect the equipment with a corrosion-inhibiting coating or paint system that has proved capable of satisfactory withstanding corrosion in accordance with ASTM B 117. Test shall be 125 hours for equipment installed indoors and 500 hours for equipment


3 of 10

installed outdoors or subjected to marine atmosphere. Each specimen shall have a standard scratch as defined in ASTM D 1654.

1.4.1 Corrosion Criteria

Upon completion of exposure, coating or paint shall show no indication of 4deterioration or loss of adhesion, nor shall there be indication of rust or corrosion extending further than 3 mm (1/8 in.) on either side of original scratch.

1.4.2 Thickness of Coating

Thickness of coating or paint system on the actual equipment shall be identical to that on the test specimens with respect to materials, conditions of application, and dry film thickness.

1.5 PRESSURE VELOCITY CLASSIFICATION Conforms to SMACNA HVACDCS, Section I, “Basic Duct Construction” PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIC MATERIALS 2.1.1 Galvanized Steel Sheets (For all ordinary air-conditioning and ventilation ducts)

Thickness shall correspond with the G90 coating designation within ASTM A525; lock-forming grade shall conform to ASTM A527.

a. Rigid Metal Ducts : General configuration; materials; application limits; and construction,

including reinforcements, joints, and seams shall be guided by SMACNA HVACDCS Section I “Basic Duct Construction”.

b. Duct Fittings : SMACNA HVACDCS Section II, “Fittings and Other Constructions” shall

guide Construction. c. Duct Hangers and Supports : SMACNA HVACDCS Section IV, “Hangers and Supports”

shall guide Configuration. d. Bird Screens : Galvanized steel; nominal 2 x 2 mesh with 1.6-mm (0.063-in.) wire

diameter. e. Insect Screens : Provide removable nominal 8 x 8 mesh with 0.028 in. wire dia. insect

screens of grooved type, with vinyl or neoprene spline insert for securing screen cloth. f. Air Filters: Disposable-element or washable type as indicated on equipment schedule.

Permanent holding frames shall be aluminum or galvanized steel. Filter-media identification and airflow direction shall be indicated on frame.

2.1.2 Replaceable Cartridge

UL 95%, Class 2, UL classified and factory assembled, use filter media of Ultra-fine glass fiber having 95% average dust spot efficiencies, as indicated on plans, with final resistance of 249 Pa (1-inch W.G.) maximum velocity of 3.18 m/sec (625 FPM) and capacity indicated.

2.1.3 Ceiling Diffusers

Steel or aluminum construction. Four-way diffusion pattern, Surface mounted. Mitered flat face borders with gaskets to overlap ceiling opening and minimize smudging on ceiling surface. Removable directional cores to provide access to accessories like opposed blade damper and connecting duct. Factory chemical treatment of bare metal surfaces prior to application of primer and baked enamel finish. Color to be selected and approved by Architect.


4 of 10

2.1.4 Air Grilles

Extruded aluminum construction. Mitered flat face borders to overlap ceiling or sidewall opening. Gaskets on supply air grille borders shall minimize smudging on ceiling or wall surfaces. Single or double set of individually adjustable streamline section blades. Retainer to firmly hold deflection setting. Factory chemical treatment of bare metal surfaces prior to application of primer and powder coated finish. Color to be selected and approved by Architect.

2.1.5 Opposed-Blade Dampers

For mounting on the neck of diffusers and grilles. Extruded aluminum construction. Gang-operated blades mounted in a rigid frame. Opposed-acting blades shall be key- or screwdriver-operated from the face of diffuser or grille. Plain mill finished.

2.1.6 Air Registers

Grilles with integral opposed-blade volume dampers. Factory assembled using rivets or retaining clips. Refer to individual description of Grilles and Opposed-Blade Volume Dampers.

2.1.7 Variable Air Volume

VAV terminal units shall be the type, size, and capacity shown and shall be mounted in the ceiling and shall be suitable for single or dual duct system applications. Actuators and controls shall be as specified in paragraph CONTROLS. Unit enclosures shall be constructed of galvanized steel not lighter than 0.85 mm (22 gauge 22 gauge or aluminum sheet not lighter than 1.3 mm (18 gauge).18 gauge. Single or multiple discharge outlets shall be provided as required. Units with flow limiters are not acceptable. Unit air volume shall be factory preset and readily field adjustable without special tools. Reheat coils shall be provided as indicated. A flow chart shall be attached to each unit. Acoustic performance of the terminal units shall be based upon units tested according to ARI 880. Sound power level shall be as indicated.. Acoustical lining shall be according to NFPA 90A.

2.2 DUCT SEALANTS

Mastic Type. Shall have excellent adhesion and elasticity for resistance to weathering, cracking, chipping, peeling, or shrinking.

Gaskets. Elastomeric type or open- or closed-cell rubber. 2.3 VOLUME DAMPERS

Balancing, factory-fabricated type. Galvanized-steel frame and blades zinc-plated shafts; and bronze bushings. Opposed-acting, die-formed interlocking blades. Blades shall operate simultaneously with minimum torque. Provide dampers with an extended shaft, quadrant operator, lever, locking setscrew, and bushing brought through the side of ducts. When installed on ducts to be thermally insulated, equip each damper-operator with stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters to provide clearance between the duct and operator not less than the thickness of insulation. Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the operator or standard accessory of damper manufacturer. Where quadrant operators are used, they shall be zinc plated with no exposed sharp edges. Quadrant shall have markings to indicate fully open or fully closed position of damper blades.

2.3.1 Fire Dampers UL 555


5 of 10

2.3.2 Back draft Dampers (Gravity Dampers or Shutters)

Factory-fabricated, with statically balanced blades that open automatically when the fan starts and close by gravity when the fan stops. Provide the edges of blades with felt or rubber strips to prevent rattling.

2.3.3 Motorized Combination Fire & Smoke Damper - unit shall be made of galvanized steel with

multiple blade damper, fire rated at 1 1/2 hour, UL standard 555, damper and actuator shall be factory assembled and tested to assure operation.

2.4 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) BOX

Unit casing shall be constructed of not less than 22 gauge galvanized sheet metal, with round inlet collars of the proper diameter and slip and drive connection on discharge opening. Single duct terminal units shall be factory assembled with a primary air damper assembly contained in a single unit housing. Interior surface of the unit casing shall be thermally and acoustically lined with a 25mm (1 inch) thick fibrous glass blanket with a black top layer and a green core. Complies with NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, UL 181, and ASTM C 1071. Thermal conductance shall be 0.26 Btu/hr-ft2-°F. The unit shall be also equipped with differential pressure sensor and actuator.

2.5 DUCTS OF PRESSURE CLASS 150 MM (6 INCH) OR LESS WATER GAUGE

Construction, metal gauge, hangers and supports, and reinforcements shall conform to SMACNA HVACDCS. Ductwork shall be airtight and shall not vibrate or pulsate when system is in operation. Air leakage shall be less than 5 percent of the system capacity. Construct ductwork of galvanized steel.

2.5.1 Laps

Make laps at joints in the direction of airflow. Space button-punch or bolt-connection in standing seams at fixed centers not greater than 150 mm. Longitudinal locks or seams, known as "Button Punch Snap-Lock" may be used in lieu of Pittsburgh Lock.

2.6 DUCT SLEEVES AND PREPARED OPENINGS 2.6.1 General Penetration Requirements

Provide sleeves or prepared openings for duct mains, branches, and other item penetrations during the construction of the surface to be penetrated. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper size and location of sleeves and prepared openings.

a. Duct Sleeves

Provide sleeves for round ducts and items 375 mm (15 in.) diameter and smaller. Sleeves, unless otherwise specified, shall be 20-ga. galvanized steel. Install structural steel sleeves where load-bearing surfaces are penetrated. Allow 25-mm (1-in.) clearance between duct and sleeve or, for insulated ducts, between insulation and sleeve, except at diffusers, grilles, and registers.

b. Prepared Openings

Provide prepared openings for rectangular ducts, round ducts, items larger than 375 mm (15 in.). Allow a 25-mm (1-in.) clearance between duct and edge of opening or, for insulated ducts, between insulation and edge of opening, except at diffusers, grilles, and registers.


6 of 10

c. Closure Collars

Provide a collar, a minimum of 100 mm (4 in.) wide, on each side of walls or floors where sleeves or prepared openings are installed. Fit collars snugly around ducts and insulation. Grind smooth edges of collar to preclude tearing or puncturing insulation covering or vapor barrier. Use nails with maximum 150 mm (6 in.) centers on collars.

2.7 DEFLECTORS

Factory-fabricated and factory-or-field-assembled units consisting of curved turning vanes for uniform air distribution and change of direction with minimum turbulence and pressure loss. Provide curved vanes for square elbows.

2.8 ACCESS DOORS

Weld doorframe in place. Door shall be rigid and airtight with neoprene gaskets and two or more galvanized steel hinges and tension fasteners. Provide doors as large as practical. Mount doors, if possible, so that air pressure holds them closed.

2.9 BACK-DRAFT DAMPERS (GRAVITY DAMPERS OR SHUTTERS)

Factory-fabricated, with statically and dynamically balanced blades that open automatically when the fan starts and close by gravity when the fan stops. Provide the edges of blades with felt or rubber strips to prevent rattling.

2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS AND CONNECTIONS

UL 181, CLASS 1, UL LISTED, SMACNA HVACDS, and additional requirements herein specified. Use to connect between rigid ducts and outlets and terminals. There shall be no erosion, delamination, loose fibers, or odors from duct into the air stream. Flexible ducts shall be maximum 8 feet in length. Maximum bend radius shall be twice of the duct diameter.

2.10.1 Materials Interlocking spiral or helically corrugated type constructed of aluminum. 2.10.2 Insulation and Vapor Barrier

ASTM C 553; minimum 50mm (2 inch) nominal thickness and 48 kg/cu.m. (3-lb/cu ft.) density The insulation shall be sheathed with a vapor barrier having a maximum water vapor permeance of 0.02 ppm ASTM F 96. Procedure C, coat ends of insulation with cement to prevent erosion and delamination.

2.10.3 Joints

Make airtight slip-joints, seal with pressure-sensitive vapor-seal tape or duct sealer, and secure with metal screws. To prevent insulation compression, place 50 mm (2 inch) wide by one -inch thick closed cell foam plastic spacer over the joints under vapor barrier such spacer.

2.11 ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINING

Acoustic duct lining shall not be less than one-inch thick flexible unicellular rubber and perforated plate. Increase duct sizes indicated to compensate for thickness of lining. Provide 6 duct diameter downstream and upstream from the air handling unit.


7 of 10


Installation shall conform to SMACNA HVACDCS and NFPA 90A, Provide mounting and support of ductwork and accessories including, but not limited to, structural supports, hangers, vibration isolators, stands, clamps and brackets, access doors, and dampers. Install ductwork accessories as indicated in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instruction. Allow clearance for inspection, repair, replacement, and service.

3.1.1 Ductwork

When air distribution systems are operated, there shall be no chatter, vibration, or dust marks. After ducts are thermally or acoustically insulated, ensure airflow area equal to duct cross section dimensions indicated.

3.1.1.1 Field Changes to Ductwork

Those required to suit the sizes of factory-fabricated equipment actually furnished, shall be designed to minimize expansion and contraction. Use gradual transitions in field changes as well as modifications to connecting ducts.

3.1.1.2 Deflectors

Provide in square elbows, duct-mounted supply outlets, take-off or extension collars to supply outlets, and tap-in branch-off connections. Adjust supply outlets to provide air volume and distribution as indicated or specified.

3.1.1.3 Access Doors

Provide for maintenance, automatic dampers, volume dampers, coils, thermostats, temperature controllers, valves, filters, humidifiers and other concealed apparatus requiring service and inspection in the duct systems.

3.1.1.4 Duct Sleeves and Prepared Openings

Install for duct mains, duct branches, and ducts passing through roofs and ceilings. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper size and location of sleeves and prepared openings.

3.1.2 Duct Hangers and Supports

SMACNA HVACDCS, Section 4. Unless otherwise indicated, provide not less than two 25 mm (one-inch) by 1.5 mm (1/16-inch) galvanized strap-iron hangers spaced one on each side of duct. Provide seismic restraint complying with SMACNA GFSR. Anchor risers in the center of the vertical run to allow ends of riser free vertical movements. Attach supports only to structural framing members and concrete slabs. Do not anchor supports to metal decking unless a means is provided and approved for preventing the anchors from puncturing the metal decking. Where supports are required between structural framing members, provide suitable intermediate metal framing. Where C clamps are used, use retainer clips.

3.1.2.1 Flexible Ducts

Support ducts by hangers every 915 mm (3 feet), unless supported by ceiling construction. Use stretch flexible air ducts to smooth out corrugations, and long radius elbows, where possible, using a minimum length to make connections.


8 of 10

3.1.2.2 Flexible Connectors

Provide flexible connectors between fans and ducts or casings and where ducts are of dissimilar metals. For round ducts, securely fasten flexible connectors by zinc-coated steel clinch-type draw-bands. For rectangular ducts, lock flexible connectors to metal collars.

3.1.3 Inspection Plates and Test Holes

Provide inspection plates and test ports at points required for work under Section 15996, “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing”, in this Division. Locate test ports in straight ducts as far as practical downstream of fans, change-of-direction fittings, takeoffs, interior to duct accessories, and similar turbulent flow sections. Test ports shall be factory-fabricated, airtight, and corrosion-resistant with screw caps and gaskets. Extend caps through insulation.

3.1.4 Flashings

Provide waterproof flashings where ducts pass through exterior walls and roofs. The roofing contractor shall do flashings.

Tightness: Penetrations shall be weather-tight; fireproof where fire-rated surfaces are penetrated; vapor-tight to prevent vapor transmission to conditioned space; sound-tight to prevent sound transmission; and airtight to normally-occupied or finished spaces where inflammable substances or gases could migrate.

3.1.5 Cleaning of Ducts

Remove all debris and dirt from ducts and wipe clean. Before installing air outlets, use the fan to blow dry air through entire system at maximum attainable velocity. Provide temporary air filters on return ducts for this operation.

3.1.6 Air Filters Install with sealant and gaskets to prevent by-passing of air. 3.1.7 Eliminators

Equip each cooling coil in casings having an air velocity of over 3.0 m/s (600 fpm) through the net face area with moisture eliminators, unless the coil manufacturer guarantees, over the signature of a responsible company official, that no moisture will be carried beyond the drip pans under actual conditions of operation.

3.1.8 Drain Pans, Drain Connections, and Drain Lines

Provide coils and eliminators with drain and drain connections. Where coils are sectionalized, with one section above the other, install intermediate drain pans. There shall be no entrainment of water in air stream. Drain condensate from drain pans to the nearest floor drains. Equip drain lines with U-traps and a seal height 25 mm (one-inch) greater than the maximum static pressure rating of the fan system.

3.2 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

The Contractor is responsible for the administration and direction of tests. Furnish instruments, equipment, connecting devices, and personnel for the tests. Notify Engineer 14 days before inspection or testing is scheduled. Correct all defects in the work. Repeat tests until the work is in compliance.


9 of 10

3.2.1 Air Duct Leakage Tests

Comply with SMACNA HVACALTM. Test ducts, plenums, and casings for air leakage. Prior to application of insulation, subject new ductwork to static pressure equivalent to that indicated. Before installing supply outlets, apply temporary caps where outlets will be connected. Connect a test blower temporarily to inlet end of duct and, by throttling its intake, adjust static pressure in duct to required value. Read voltage and current to blower motor and total static pressure across blower wheel. Apply these data to AMCA certified performance table for the test blower to derive volumetric flow rate (cfm) of air injected into duct. Remove temporary caps and test blower. Verify the maximum allowable air leakage of the total air that the duct is required to deliver. Perform the measurement of leakage using a calibrated orifice tube with its individual calibration curve.

3.2.2 Performance Testing and Balancing Section 15996, "Testing and Balancing Air and Water Systems." PART 4 - CIRCULAR VAV AND CAV 4.1 AIR VOLUME CONTROL TERMINALS 4.1.1 Installation Instructions:

VAV terminals shall be installed using at least two support brackets (DIN-rail or L-profile), with anti-vibration rubber under the terminal. Each of these brackets shall be fixed with two threaded rods to the ceiling slab above.

This installation method:

a. Shall prevent the body of the VAV terminal from high mechanical tension, which could damage the construction and performance of the terminal.

b. Shall prevent torsion on the VAV terminals, which could cause malfunction of the

damper blades.

c. Provides some flexibility to the final location of the VAV terminals.

d. Use at least 1x diameter straight duct length before the VAV inlet.

e. Additional manual volume control dampers (VCD’s) before the inlet are not required/ recommended.

f. All connections shall be thermally isolated.

g. Pressure sensing tubes of Flo-Cross® airflow sensor shall not be “kinked” or otherwise

obstructed by the external duct insulation.

Installation of circular VAV terminals can be done in a similar way, with the only assumption that two circular support brackets with anti-vibration rubber (installation clamps) instead of DIN-rail or L-profile shall be used. To prevent the VAV terminal from rotation, we recommend to use a complete clamp (support + top bracket), so that the terminal is ‘clammed’ in between.

Optional 4 x Mupro fixing hooks can be used (see drawing).


10 of 10


Duct works (PVC or Metal), diffusers, registers, grilles, VAV boxes and sheet metal shall either be counted or measured in linear meters, actually installed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.




******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 – Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specification Secondary Cables and Wire

for Load Side of Mech’l Equipment

1 of 4

SECTION 15896 – SECONDARY CABLES AND WIRE FOR LOAD SIDE OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – SECONDARY CABLES AND WIRE 1.1 SECONDARY CABLES AND WIRE

(1) The cables to be considered as “Secondary Cable and Wire” shall be the cables from distribution panels to final load.

(2) When possible these secondary cables and wires shall be of the same type as the

main cables. (XLPE multi-core cables) (3) When wires shall be used for secondary connection (only), the wires shall be in

accordance with the following:

(a) All wires shall be copper, soft-drawn and annealed, shall be of 99% conductivity, shall be smooth and true of cylindrical form and variation shall be within 1% of the actual size called for.

(b) All wires and cables shall comply with the requirement of the Underwriters

Laboratories, the A.S.T.M., I.C.E.A. and other relevant Standards as they apply to the particular usage.

(c) All wires and cables shall be as manufactured from a reputable and approved

manufacturer. (d) Wires and cables for power and lighting system shall be plastic insulated for

600 volts working pressure type “THHN” type unless otherwise noted on plans or specified.

(e) All wires for lightings power shall be stranded copper. (f) For Lighting and power systems no wire smaller than 3.5 mm sq. shall be

used, except for control leads or otherwise specified. (g) Color Coding Shall be provided for all service, feeder, branch, control and signaling circuit

conductors. Color shall be green for grounding conductors, and black for neutrals. The color of the underground conductors in different voltage systems shall be as follows:

(i) 230 volts, 1-phase : Phase A-Red Phase B-Yellow

(ii) 460 volt, 3-phase : Phase A-Red Phase B-Yellow Phase C-Blue (iii) The grounded conductors should be only of yellow/green type. (h) Splices and Termination Components Connectors for wires 5.5 mm2and smaller shall be insulated pressure-type or

twist lock splicing connector. Solder less lugs shall be provided on stranded conductors.



2 of 4

1.2 CONTROL CABLES

(1) All control cable shall be as JIS, PEC, NEC or equivalent standard. Control cable shall be rigid copper type with minimum size of 1.0 mm2, PVC or XLPE insulation. They shall be of the control type with a standard number of cores of 12, 19, 27 or 37.

(2) The instrumental cable type can be used as well if of the following type: (a) Collectively screened (b) No armour (3) The collectively screened instrument cable type shall be used when electromagnetic

influences are present, or to ease installation. (4) The instrument cable type shall include only the following standard number of pairs 5,

10, 30 or 50. 1.3 CABLE MARKING AND SPLICES

(1) The Contractor shall develop a cable numbering list to be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

(2) All main and control cables shall be labeled at both ends with clear indication of the

cable number in accordance with the developed cable list. (3) Conductor identification shall be provided within each enclosure where a tap, splice

or termination is made. For conductors 16 mm2 and larger, color coding shall be by plastic-coated self –sticking markers, colored nylon cable ties and plates, or heat-shrink type sleeves. Control circuit terminations shall be identified.

(4) Splices shall be made in accessible locations; splices in conductors 5.5mm2 and

smaller shall be made with an insulated pressure type connector, splices in conductor 8 mm2 and larger, color coding shall be by plastic-coated self-sticking markers, colored nylon cable ties and plates, or heat-shrink type sleeves. Control circuit terminations shall be identified.

1.4 CABLE AND WIRES- INSTALLATION

1.4.1 Secondary Cables and Wires Routing

(1) Secondary cables and wire shall use cable trays or ladder. (2) Where this is not possible the routing has to be made in accordance with the

following: (a) Conduits in general shall be Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) with an

interior coating. (b) Polyvinyl-chloride conduit (PVC) shall be heavy wall, schedule 40, with factory

made bends, couplings and fittings. (c) No Conduits shall be used in any system smaller than 20mm (3/4 inch)

diameter electric trade size, nor shall have more than four (4) 90 degree bends in any one run and where necessary, pull boxes shall be provided as directed.

(d) No wire shall be pulled into any conduit until the conduit system is completed

in all details, in the case of concealed work until all rough plastering masonry



3 of 4

has been completed, and in the case of exposed work until the conduit work has been completed in every detail.

(e) The ends of all conduits shall be tightly plugged to avoid entrance of plaster,

dust and moisture while the construction of building is in progress. All conduits shall be reamed to remove all burrs.

(f) All pipes and fittings on exposed work shall be IMC and be secured by means

of metal clips, which shall be held in place by means of machine screws. When running over concrete surface, the screws shall be held in place by means of expansion sleeves. All pipes on exposed work shall be run at right angles to and parallel with the surroundings walls. No diagonal runs shall be allowed and all bends and offsets shall be avoided as much as possible. Where necessary conduit fittings shall be used. Conduits in all cases, shall be supported at 1.50 meter intervals maximum.

(g) No splicing of wires shall be made inside the conduit run from equipment to

box or from one box to another box. Splicing shall be done only in boxes.

1.4.2 Insulated Bushings

Bushing shall be made in such way to protect cables and wires as well as allowing easy maintenance.

PART 2 – PANEL AND CABINETS 2.1 Except when specified, all panels and cabinets shall be of the surface mounted type. 2.2 Standard panels and cabinets, as much as possible, shall be used and assembled on Site. All

panels shall be dead front construction, furnished with trims for mounting as required. Cabinets shall be code gauge steel with gutters at least 100mm wide and wider if necessary. The trim for all panels shall be finished in industrial gray enamel over a coat of rust inhibitor.

2.3 Panelboard main bus work shall be ampacity rated to equal or exceed overcurrent protective

device immediately ahead of it. All buswork shall be properly secured to withstand available short circuit forces at the location.

2.4 Distribution panels shall be equipped with two poles and three poles air circuit breakers of

sizes, voltage ratings and interrupting capacity as called for on the Drawings. 2.5 Panelboard buses: Copper bus bars shall be supported on bases independent of the circuit

breakers. Main buses and back pans shall be designed so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping. A separate ground bus marked with a green stripe along its front shall be provided and bonded to the steel cabinet for connecting grounding conductors.

2.6 Mounting heights: Panelboards, circuit breakers and disconnecting switches shall be mounted

so the height of the operating handle at its highest position shall not exceed 1.8m from the floor.

PART 3 – INDIVIDUAL BREAKERS AND SWITCHES 3.1 GENERAL (1) Individual circuit breakers, safety switches and disconnect switches shall be provided

where indicated on the Drawings or as required by the situation and the price is deemed to be included in the bid.

(2) Voltage ratings shall be suitable in each case of service application.



4 of 4

(3) Enclosures shall be General Purpose. (4) Unless otherwise specified, minimum interrupting level for 230 volts circuit breakers

shall be 10 KA. 3.2 OPERATION TYPE (1) Circuit breakers shall consist of a quick-make, quick-break type entirely trip-free

operating mechanism with contact, arch-interrupter, and thermal magnetic trip unit for each pole, all enclosed in a molded-phenolic case.

(2) The thermal-magnetic trip unit shall provide time-delayed overload protection in case

of overload or short circuit current in any one pole. (3) Circuit breaker shall be trip indicating, with the tripped position of breaker handle

midway between “ON” and “OFF” positions. 3.3 RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKER (RCCB) (1) Shall be pole 250 volts maximum, 60Hz, rated at 25 amperes with adjustable ground

fault current sensitivity. (2) RCCB shall provide protection against ground fault (earth-leakage) current. (3) It shall stay independent in operation using a core balance current transformer for

differential current sensing and tripping. (4) RCCB shall have complete mounting box and accessories. (5) RCCB shall be of approved manufacture. PART 4 – DISCONNECT MEANS 4.1 Disconnect means shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings at motor locations.

Disconnect switches shall be fusible or non-fusible as required and of sizes as indicated on the Drawings.

4.2 Disconnects shall be KW rated, of sufficient capacity to carry the continuous current of the

load it controls and of the correct voltage rating. 4.3 Air or Gas circuit breakers shall be used where feeder and motor protective means require.

Circuit breaker shall be provided at each motor location where it is not within the sight of respective control starter, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. All circuit breakers shall be totally enclosed.

* * * * *

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 – Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specification Space Temperature Control Systems

1 of 15

SECTION 15971 - SPACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publication is referred to in the text by basic designation only.

1.1.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications B31.1-83 Power piping; Addenda B 31.1 A-84; Addenda B 31.1B-84 Addenda B 31.1 C-84; Addenda B 31.1D-84

B31.5 83 Refrigeration Piping; Addenda B 31.5 A-85

1.1.2 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

Publications 15-78 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration 1.1.3 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Publications Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes (AM 80, Am 82) 1.1.4 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications A 126-84 Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, Specification for 1.1.5 Factory Mutual System (FM) Publications Approval Guide (1984) 1.1.6 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications 70-84 National Electrical Code (NEC) 1.1.7 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) Publications 1976-1 Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards (1976) 1975-4 High Pressure Duct Construction Standards (1975-4) 1.1.8 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Publications 1980 Fire Protection Equipment List. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements" applies to this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein.

1.2.1 Description of Work

The work includes providing new automatic space temperature control (ATC) systems including associated equipment and appurtenances. Provide each system complete and ready for operation. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.5, ASHRAE 15, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, NFPA 70, and SMACNA Low and High Pressure Duct Construction Standards, except as specified or


2 of 15

indicated otherwise. In the publications referred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be considered to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears; reference to the "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted to mean the Engineer. Provide control systems to maintain the conditions indicated, to perform the functions indicated, and to operate in the sequence specified. Provide control systems of the electronic, or electric type, or any combination of these types compatible with the existing controls. Control diagrams showing one type of control system on the drawings are not intended to show a preference for that type system. Installation shall be made by or under the direct supervision of competent technicians regularly employed in the installation and calibration of automatic temperature controls (ATC). Control equipment, valves, panels, and dampers shall bear the manufacturer's name plate. Where the distance from the sensing element to a panel exceeds the manufacturer's recommended capillary length, provide a remote transmitter between the sensing element, and the operating and adjusting mechanism at the panel. The contractor shall verify with the equipment manufacturer/supplier to ensure that the control system will have no conflict on its operation.

1.2.2 Submittals Required 1.2.2.1 Manufacturer's Data a. Valves and operators

b. Stand Alone Control Units and Accessories

c. Temperature sensors, including complete wiring and connection diagrams

d. Pressure sensors, including complete wiring and connection diagrams

e. Dew point and humidity sensors, including complete wiring and connection diagrams

f. Switches, relays, including complete wiring and connection diagrams

g. Smoke detection devices

h. Temperature indicators including remote bulb sensor.

i. Damper Actuators

1.2.2.2 Shop Drawings a. Temperature control schematic and wiring diagrams

b. Sequence of operation for each system and function

c. Control panels

d. Equipment interlocks as specified under "Sequence of Operations"

e. One-line diagrams from sensor and control points to stand alone control unit, including

all components signal values, cables, and terminal markings.

1.2.2.3 Certificates of Compliance a. Valves b. Smoke detectors 1.2.2.4 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Furnish an operation and maintenance manual for each item of equipment listed under "Manufacturer's Data." The manuals shall contain full hardware support documentation, which shall include, without being limited to, the following:

a. General description and specifications

b. Installation and initial checkout procedures


3 of 15

c. Principles and theory of operation

d. Detailed electrical and logical description

e. Complete trouble-shooting procedures, diagrams, and guidelines

f. Complete alignment and calibration procedures for all components

g. Preventive maintenance requirements

h. Detailed schematics and assembly drawings

i. Complete spare parts lists

j. Signal identification and timing diagrams

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Sensors, industrial or commercial grade, shall be compatible with the automatic temperature control (ATC) equipment provided and shall have accuracies as stated herein. Instrument characteristics such as hysteresis, relaxation time, span, including maximum and minimum limits shall be coordinated for all applications of sensors and controls, so that the control system shall operate smoothly and accurately throughout the design range.

2.1.1 Stand-alone Control Units and Accessories

The system shall utilize intelligent distributed Stand-Alone Control Units to interface sensors being monitored and equipment being controlled by the system. Each unit shall be microprocessor based and has the capability to perform the following functions:

a. Evaluate and report changes of state and or value that occur among points associated

with the remote unit.

b. Locally perform direct digital control (DDC) of all common mechanical system functions. Such functions shall be programmed using a sequential, numbered-statement programming language.

c. Acquire, process, accept, transfer information and execute commands, to and from the

central computer, network computer, operators, terminal & other remote units or other input devices.

Each stand-alone control unit shall execute all application programs, calculations and commands via a 16-bit microcomputer resident in the unit. All data base for each unit and the operating system and all application programs for each unit shall be stored within the unit. Each stand-alone control unit shall contain a real time clock to enable the unit to automatically perform time-based functions.

Each control unit shall be capable of full operation either as a completely independent unit or as a part of the building wide control system. All units shall contain the necessary equipment for direct interface to sensors and actuators connected to it. Control strategies shall be owner definable at multiple control unit locations, and for all control units in the system from any one operator terminal.

Each stand-alone control unit shall include its own microcomputer direct digital controller, power supply input/output modules, and battery. The battery shall be self-charging and be capable of supporting all memory/within the control unit if the commercial power to the unit is interrupted or lost for a minimum of eight (8) hours.

Each unit shall perform continuous diagnostics and any malfunction shall be annunciated at the operator's console as well as visually at the remote unit.


4 of 15

Failure of any unit on the system shall not affect the proper operation of the remaining system components.

The system shall be capable of phased startup. That is, any unit shall be capable of properly communicating with the rest of the system while remaining units are being installed.

Surge transient protecting shall be provided in each unit for the purpose of suppressing induced voltage transients.

All units shall be listed by Underwriters laboratories (UL) against fire and shock hazard as a signal system appliance unit.

Units shall have all metal cabinets. Each unit including cabinet, power supply, function cards and termination modules shall be approved by U.L. Each unit shall have a pin-hinged door and master keyed lock. Remote units shall be capable of proper operation in an ambient environment of 0 degree C (32 degrees F) and 10% to 90% RH.

2.1.2 Input / Output Types

Each stand-alone control unit shall be capable of accepting multiple point inputs and outputs. These shall be of four types corresponding to industry nomenclature. They are as follows:

a. DIGITAL IN for monitoring status, alarms and accumulating pulses.

b. DIGITAL OUT for commanding two and three state devices.

c. ANALOG IN for measuring values

d. ANALOG OUT for positioning set points

It shall be possible for each remote unit to monitor the following types of inputs, without the addition of equipment outside the remote unit cabinets:

a. Analog Inputs (1) 4-20mA

(2) Thermistors b. Digital Inputs (1) Dry Contact Closure (2) Pulse accumulator

The remote unit shall directly control electronic actuator and control devices. Each control unit shall be capable of providing the following control outputs without the addition of equipment outside the remote unit cabinet:

a. Digital Outputs (contact closure)

(1) Motor Starters, Sizes 1-4 b. Analog Outputs (1) 4-20mA

(2) 0-16vDC (3) 0-135 Ohms


5 of 15

2.1.3 Operators Interface

The control system shall permit full operator communication including: obtaining information about the performance of his system; allowing the operator to change the system operation; and diagnosing system malfunctions. Operator communication shall be through the use of any one of the following operator terminals which can directly connected to the remote unit.

a. Printer

b. 17 inch LCD monitor

c. Central Computer

d. Network (Personal) computer

e. Portable Programming Unit

2.1.4 User Programmability

All temperature control strategies shall be definable by the operator through a portable programming unit. The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation necessary to allow the operator to independently perform the functions listed below:

a. Read the value of a measured variable (i.e. temperature)

b. Start or stop equipment

c. Monitor the status of equipment being controlled

d. Read the set point of a control loop

e. Determine the control strategies that have been defined for a specific piece of equipment

f. Generate displays of control strategies

g. Add/delete control loops to the system

h. Add/delete points to the system

i. Creates, modify or delete control strategies

j. Assign sensors and/or actuators to a control strategy

k. Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters

l. Enable or disable control strategies

m. Generate hardcopy records of control strategies on a printer

n. Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state(s)

2.1.5 Automatic Temperature Control Valves

Provide minimum ANSI Class 125, cast iron (for steel piping systems) valves installed with stems horizontal or above. Valves shall have flanged end connections, except valves smaller than 65 mm may have threaded end connections with a union on all but one side of the valve. Cast iron components shall conform to ASTM A 126, Class B or C.

2.1.6 Self Diagnostics and Alarm Reporting

Each stand alone unit shall contain self diagnostics that continuously monitor the proper operation of the unit. A malfunction of the unit will be reported, and will inform the operator of the nature or the malfunction and the control unit affected. It shall be possible to annunciate malfunction as well as other control unit at a selected operator’s terminal.


6 of 15

2.1.7 Valve Operators

Provide electronic type with spring return so that, in the event of power failure, they will FAIL SAFE in either the normally open or closed position as indicated or specified. Operators shall function properly within range of 85 to 110 percent of the motive power of the system.

2.1.8 Temperature Sensors

Provide analog or binary type, as specified or indicated. Analog temperature sensors shall provide an output signal that varies linearly and continuously with the sensed temperature, within a specified range, and shall be thermistor or resistance type. Binary temperature sensors shall provide an output signal that is either ON or OFF depending upon whether the sensed temperature is above or below the set point temperature and shall be electric type. All sensors of a particular category in any one building shall be of the same type and manufacturer. Temperature sensors shall be suitable for one or more of the following mounting styles: room (space) type, insertion (air duct) type, or immersion (liquid) type. Provide temperature sensors with the following characteristics:

a. Insertion or Immersion Types -- Stem or tip sensitive type only, unless otherwise

indicated.

b. Sensing Elements -- Hermetically sealed, except for bimetal type for room thermostats,

c. Stem, Tip, or Extended Element Construction -- Type 304 stainless steel or copper.

d. External Trim Material -- Completely corrosion resistant to media in which it is inserted or immersed, with all parts assembled into a watertight (except room type), vibration-proof, heat resistant assembly.

e. Thermometer Wells -- Of bronze or stainless steel materials; thermal transmission material shall be compatible with the sensor.

2.1.8.1 Electronic Analog Temperature Sensors

Sensors shall operate throughout the range of minus -40 (-40) to plus 102 degree C (216 degrees F) for normal heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) sensing; and throughout the range of zero to 260 degrees C (500 degrees F) for high temperature sensing. Where specified or indicated, sensors shall be individually calibrated to provide an allowable deviation not to exceed plus minus 0.10 degrees F. Sensors shall have a time constant response to achieve 63 percent of a step temperature change in 3 seconds and 98 percent of a step temperature change in 6 seconds in water flowing at 3 fps. All sensors of the same type shall be interchangeable without subsequent calibration, and shall provide an allowable deviation not to exceed that defined in the following equation:

D = 0.005 times the absolute value of (X - 70F) + 0.5 F

where D = Allowable Deviation, plus or minus, degrees F F = degree Fahrenheit X = Any temperature through out range, minus -1.1.C (30F) to

plus 135 C (275F), or zero to plus 260 C (500F) 2.1.8.2 Outside Air Sensing Type

Provide sun shades to minimize solar effects and shall be mounted to minimize building outside air film effects.

2.1.9 Pressure Sensors

Construct the entire assembly so that shock, vibration, and pressure surges of 150 percent of operating pressure range, but not less than 1.77 kg/sq. cm-gauge (25 psig), above or below


7 of 15

scale will neither harm the sensor or affect its accuracy. Provide pressure sensors with the following characteristics:

a. Ambient Temperature -- 40 to 140 degrees F.

b. Pressure Sensing Elements -- Provide corrosion resistant type.

c. Switches -- Provide snap-action type with platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold-plated

wiping contacts rated for the application consistent with switched voltages and power levels.

2.1.10 Relative Humidity Sensors

Sensors shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use. Sensors mounted outdoors shall be protected from wind and rain by a suitable weather hood. Provide a suitable shield for sensors mounted indoor and subject to air velocities greater than manufacturer's recommended limits.

2.1.10.1 Relative Humidity Sensor

Sensor shall be an analog precision resistance or hygro-mechanical gage type relative humidity detector. Sensor shall have an allowable deviation of plus or minus 1.0 percent of relative humidity over the range of zero to 100 percent relative humidity.

2.1.11 Fire Protection Devices

Provide Smoke detectors in the supply and return air ducts. Detectors shall be UL listed or FM approved for duct installation (To be provided by electrical contractor).

2.1.11.1 Smoke Duct Detectors

See Division 16 Section 16722. Provide duct detectors with approved duct housing, mounted exterior to the duct and with perforated sampling tubes extending across the width of the duct. Activation of duct detectors shall cause shut down of the associated air handling unit and operation of dampers; and annunciation or the signal source and tripping of the master fire alarm box or other building fire alarm transmitter, but shall not cause sounding of the building interior alarm devices.

2.2 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC POWER SUPPLY AND WIRING

120 volts or less, 60 Hertz, 2 pole, 3-wire with ground. The devices shall be UL listed or FM approved.

2.2.1 Relays Provide open contact, mercury tube or electronic type with dustproof enclosures. 2.2.2 Manual Transfer Switches

Provide with operating levers and index plates showing switch positions and names of apparatus controlled or other appropriate designations.

2.2.3 Wiring

Provide complete electric wiring for temperature control apparatus, including wiring to transformer primaries. Control circuit conductors run in same conduit as power circuit conductors shall have same insulation level as power circuit conductors. Circuits operating at more than 100 volts shall be in accordance with Section 16402, "Interior Wiring Systems." Circuits operating at 100 volts or less shall be defined as low voltage and shall be run in rigid or flexible conduit, metallic tubing, metal raceways or wire way, armored cable, or multi-conductor cable. Provide switches and fuses for the protection and convenient operation of the system.


8 of 15

Aluminum sheathed cable or aluminum conduit may be used but shall not be buried in concrete. Protect exposed wiring from abuse and damage in an approved manner. Wire for low voltage AC shall be insulated copper No. 20 AWG or larger and shall conform to NFPA 70, Type MTW, THHN, TFFN or BN. For low voltage DC and electronic circuits carrying less than 0.5 amperes, cables of two or more conductors, not smaller than No. 22 AWG Solid copper if shielded or No. 20 AWG solid copper if not shielded, may be used in lieu of individual wires. Shield cable carrying analog signals. Cable shall terminate in solder or screw type terminal strips. Cable shall not be tapped at intermediate points. Wires, whether individual or in cables, shall be intermediate color coded or numbered for identification. Cables terminating in screw type terminal strips shall have pressure type connectors. Wire in physical contact with compression screw will not be acceptable.

2.3 TEMPERATURE INDICATORS

Provide an indicator with remote bulb sensors. Indicators shall have midpoint readings approximately equal to the normal temperature of air. Provide indicators with stainless steel case, 90 mm (3.5 inch) minimum diameter dial with glass face gasketed within the case; accuracy within one percent of scale range. Provide scale range suitable for intended service.


Provide all necessary, wiring and conduit to connect the ATC components to secure an operational ATC system.

3.1.1 Wiring

Wiring from sensors and control devices, indicated or specified shall be provided to terminal blocks located in the Stand Alone Control Units. Permanently mark the terminal blocks and wires for identification.

3.1.2 Workmanship Wiring and the installation thereof shall conform to NFPA 70. 3.1.3 Identification

Label or code each field wire at each end. Permanently label or code each point of all field terminal strips to show the instrument or item served. Color coded cable with annotated cable diagrams may be used to accomplish cable identification.

3.1.4 Temperature Sensors

Stabilize sensors to permit on-the-job installations that will require minimum field adjustments or calibrations. Temperature sensor assemblies shall be readily accessible and adaptable to each type of application in such a manner as to allow for quick, easy replacement and servicing without special tools or skills. Strap-on mountings, utilizing helical screw stainless steel clamps, shall be permitted on hot water piping up to 75 mm (3-inch) sizes only, when pipe is cleaned to bright metal and strap on bulb and pipe is suitably insulated after installation. All other liquid temperature sensors shall be provided with wells. Outdoor installations shall be of weatherproof construction, designed to exclude driving rain or snow, or in NEMA 3R enclosures. Sensors shall be with brushed- aluminum or brushed stainless steel enclosures where located in finished spaces.

3.1.5 Duct Sensors

Provide sensors in ducts in general location indicated on drawings; specific location within duct shall allow accurate sensing of the air properties indicated or specified. Do not locate in dead air spaces or positions obstructed by such items as ducts or equipment. The location of


9 of 15

installation shall be within the vibration and velocity limits of the sensing element. Where an extended surface element is required to properly sense the average or lowest air temperature, it shall be positioned and securely mounted within the duct in a manner approved by the sensor manufacturer. Temperature sensing elements shall be thermally isolated from brackets and supports to respond to air temperature only. Provide separate duct flange for each sensing element; securely seal ducts where elements or connections penetrate duct. Seal penetrations of duct insulation vapor barrier with vapor barrier coating compound to provide a vapor tight covering. Mount sensor enclosures so that they may be removed and serviced without disturbance or removal of the duct installation or vapor barrier.

3.1.6 Pipe Sensors

Provide all sensors measuring temperatures in pressure vessels or in pipes larger than 25 mm (1 inch) in diameter, except as specified herein, with wells properly fabricated for the service. Wells shall be non-corrosive to the medium being measured and shall have sufficient physical strength to withstand all (including test) pressures and velocities to which they are subjected. Where piping diameters are smaller than the length of the wells, provide wells in the piping at elbows to affect proper flow across the entire area of the well; wells may either look up-stream or down-stream. Provide suitable thermal transmission material within the well to speed the response of temperature measurement. Provide wells with sealing nuts to contain the thermal transmission material and allow for easy removal. Well shall not restrict flow area to less than 70 percent of line-size-pipe normal flow area.

3.1.7 Pressure Sensors

Provide sensors in NEMA 3R enclosures and provide sensors which are corrosion resistant throughout.

3.1.8 Temperature Indicators Mount temperature indicators to allow readability when standing at floor level.

3.2 ADJUSTMENTS

Adjust controls and equipment to maintain the conditions indicated, to perform the functions indicated, and to operate in the sequence specified.

3.3 INSTRUCTING OPERATING PERSONNEL

Upon completion of the work and at a time designated by the Engineer, provide the services of a competent technician regularly employed by the Contractor of the temperature controls for the instruction of the Airport personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of each automatic space temperature control system. The period of instruction shall be for not less than three-8-hour working days.

3.4 NAMEPLATES

Provide laminated plastic nameplates for all control items listed or shown in the submittal and approved control diagrams. Each inscription shall identify its function; such as mixed air controller,' 'cold deck sensor,' and when applicable, its position. Laminated plastic shall be 3mm thick Melamine plastic, black with white center core. Surface shall be a matte finish. All corners shall be square. The lettering shall be accurately aligned and engraved into the white core. Size of nameplates shall be 25 mm by 65 mm minimum. Lettering shall be minimum 6mm high normal block lettering. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system. Mount charts and schedules under glass, in a frame, and place where directed near each system. Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule to the Engineer prior to final acceptance.


10 of 15

3.5 TESTING

Contractor shall submit two copies of the operation and maintenance manual and two copies of a test plan to the Engineer not less than 14 days prior to acceptance testing. Test plan shall, as a minimum, indicate how ATC system is to be tested, what variables will be monitored during test, and what criteria for acceptance should be used. Indicate how operation of HVAC system and ATC system in all seasonal conditions shall be simulated. If the Engineer witnesses any tests, such tests shall be subject to his approval. If the Engineer elects not to witness the tests, Contractor shall provide performance certification.

3.5.1 Field Testing

Upon completion of 72 hours of continuous HVAC and ATC systems operations and before final acceptance of the work, Contractor shall test the automatic temperature control systems in service with the ventilating and air conditioning systems to demonstrate conformance with the contract requirements. Test controls through every cycle of operation, including simulation of each season in so far as possible. Test safety controls to demonstrate performance of their required function. Test data terminal cabinet for the presence of properly identified and accurate signals at each terminal connected to a sensor. Test for proper response to signals transmitted to the ATC controllers and actuators. Contractor shall furnish instruments, power supply, connecting devices, and personnel for the tests. If any of the automatic space temperature control equipment is proved to be defective in workmanship or material, adjust, repair, or replace the system. Repeat the tests to demonstrate conformance with the contract requirements.

PART 4 - CONTROLS DEVICES ACCESSORIES

4.1 SCOPE OF WORK

The contractor shall supply and install all the control equipment, auxiliary devices,

instruments, etc. to perform satisfactory operations of all systems described in the

specifications and/or indicated on the drawings. The drawings and the specifications are

complemented each to the other. The sequence of operation of each system or piece of

equipment is specified either under the equipment specification section or detailed on the

drawings.

4.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

a. Control system shall be of the electric, or electronics, (solid state) or a combination of

them to provide the required sequence of operation. Controls shall have interface to

building management and DCC systems.

b. Provide all relays, switches, gauges, sources of electricity and all other auxiliaries,

accessories and connections necessary to make a complete operable system.

c. Install controls so that adjustments and calibrations can be readily made.

d. Unless otherwise noted, install all wall mounted thermostats 1400 mm above the

floor, measured to the center line of instruments.

e. Insertion type thermostats shall have adjusting head at eye level, wherever

practicable, for adjustment and calibration.

f. Install all control valves horizontally with the power unit up.

g. Unless stated otherwise temperatures shall be controlled within plus or minus

2°F(1°C) and humidity within plus or minus 5 per cent of the set point.


11 of 15

h. Provide positive positioner devices on all controls operated in sequence and/or where

specified or required to maintain the set point within the required limits without

override.

i. After completion of installation, all automatic controls shall be regulated and adjusted

and placed in complete operating conditions subject to the approval of the Engineer

and a maintenance brochure including all operating instructions, specifications and

sheets for all instruments shall be submitted by the Contractor.

j. Electric control systems shall conform to the requirements shown on the Drawings

and shall effect the operation of the air conditioning systems contemplated by the

design.

k. After all controls, valves and motors have been connected, test the systems in the

presence of the Engineer to demonstrate the capability of each automatic control

system to meet contract requirements.

l. Basic components shall be standard catalogue products of single reputable

Manufacturer.

m. Do not duplicate factory furnished controls of unitary equipment like refrigeration

machines, fan coil units, etc. but modify them to conform to these specifications.

Obtain from the manufacturer of unitary equipment, and submit written certification

that proposed control circuit modifications do not conflict with or invalidate

Manufacturer’s equipment warranty.

n. Instrument wire shall be run in conduits separate from other types of writing and shall

terminate on identified terminal strips.

o. The wire terminals on instruments shall not be used as junction points to facilitate

removal of instruments without disturbing others.

p. Instruments shall have laminated plastic name tags with tag numbers and service

engraved on the tag. Tags shall be securely fastened to the instrument. Tags shall be

black with white lettering.

q. The equipment shall be restarted after a power failure in the same sequence and with

the same time delays as specified for normal start-up.

4.3 CONTROL PANEL AND CONTROL SYSTEM

a) Control panels shall be installed where shown and as required on the Drawings. Each

panel shall include start-stop and pilot lights for all major equipment being controlled

together with their starters and necessary heat detector, alarm and other related

safety and fire alarm systems.

b) The control system shall be of DDC type and shall be complete with all necessary

transformers, thermostats, valves, dampers, damper operators, and associated

regulators required to maintain the conditions desired together with the

thermometers, gauges, and other necessary accessories and the control wiring.

c) Shop drawings shall be schematic diagrams showing all the components of the

control systems and the interconnection scheme. Each component shall be identified

by name and/or schedule number of equipment item it controls.

d) Manufacturer’s detailed Shop Drawings, specifications, and data sheets for all

equipment to be furnished shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.


12 of 15

4.4 CONTROL DEVICES

a. TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS (With Remote Sensors)

Shall be supplied complete with metal cases and manual set point adjusters.

Room type controllers shall be mounted 1800 mm above the floor and in an

accessible location.

Panel-mounted controllers shall be supplied with metal mounting adaptor plate and

mounting assembly.

Controllers shall be designed for a throttling range of 2°F (1 °C) for a 3Vdc output

change with a control dial range 55-85 °F (13-29°C) and shall be suitable for ambient

operating limits 40-135 °F (4-57 °C).

b. DAMPERS

(1) Motorized automatic dampers shall be of the louver type with not less than 13

gauge welded steel frames and galvanized finish. Blades shall have

interlocking edges, stainless steel side springs (or vinyl or neoprene gaskets),

and Teflon-coated stainless steel thrust washers. Blades shall be edged with

neoprene if the damper is to operate in outside air service either as an intake

or discharge damper. Damper blades shall have steel trunnions mounted in

nylon or iolite bearings.

(2) Dampers shall be not more than 1200mm. in length between bearings.

Modulating dampers shall be of the opposed blade type unless specified

otherwise. Blades shall be not over 200mm. in width and shall not be less

than 16 gauge galvanized steel. Hardware shall be zinc plated. One damper

actuator shall be provided for each 1.5 sq. meter of damper area.

(3) Provide parallel blade dampers arranged for maximum turbulence and mixing

of outside air with return air. Arrange dampers as necessary to prevent

stratification or provide baffles necessary to correct stratification problems.

(4) Provide dampers of low leakage construction, so designed that the maximum

leakage shall be 10 cfm/ft2 (0.005 m3/s/m2) of damper with 4” WG. (1 Kpa)

Pressure differential applied.

c. Temperature Sensors

Duct temperature sensors shall have their sensing elements immersed inside the

duct and the wiring enclosure mounting on the outer surface of the duct and shall be

of the averaging duct type with linear output and suitable for ambient limits -40 to 250

°F (-40 to 150 °C).

Sensor shall be complete with a steel wiring enclosure with ½” (13mm) conduit

knockout (top and bottom) and a 5 feet (1.5m) long sensing element.

Sensors shall be of corrosion proof construction.

Sensing elements for water pipe mounting shall be of the rod and tube type with

linear output and shall be furnished complete with separable stainless steel bulb wells

filled with heat conductive compound. Sensors shall be factory calibrated and

tamperproof. If easily adjustable sensors are provided, they shall be located inside

metal enclosures with cylinder lock and key to prevent unauthorized setting.


13 of 15

d) Room Thermostats

(1) Shall have metal locking covers and shall be provided with concealed

adjustment means, and with thermometers.

Each room thermostat shall be supplied with metal auxiliary mounting bases

and metal subbase for surface mounting applications; plus a plastic guard to

protect thermostat from damage.

(2) Line voltage on/off thermostats shall be of the bimetal operated snap action

switch. They shall be underwriter’s laboratories Inc., listed at an electrical

rating appropriate to the application. Thermostat shall operate on 2°F (1°C)

differential and shall have a control dial range 55-85 °F (13-29 °C).

(3) Low voltage thermostats shall be of the self contained type with a 1000 ohm

sensing element and an amplifier. Thermostat shall have a control dial range

55-85 °F (13-29°C) and a throttling range of 2°F (1°C) for a 3 Vdc output

change.

4.5 Motorized Valves and Actuators

4.5.1 Motorized Control Valves- Type B

Motorized Control Valve shall be low voltage, 2-way, 2 modulating flow through operation of

motor actuator and valve linkage in response to signal from proportional controller. To have

the following features:

a. Application: As indicated on plans (AHUs and FCUs).

b. Single seated valve, straight-through pattern; screwed end connections, bronze body

and removable brass seat on 15 to 50 mm sizes; flanged end connections, cast iron

body and removable bronze seat on 65mm sizes and above; stainless steel stem and

composition disc with removable throttling plugs.

c. reversing type motor, oil-immersed gear train, die- cast aluminium case, dual stroke

(90 and 160 degrees), double-ended crankshaft and die-cast aluminium cover with

built-in transformer.

d. Linkage directly mounted on motor, without adjustment requirements and comprising

roller, slide mechanism, cam and stem position indicator and with 160 lb. seal-off

force

e. Valve rated 240 deg. F maximum water temperature and 125 psi maximum pressure

for flanged end connections and 150 psi for screwed end connections.

f. Motor rated 125 deg. F maximum ambient temperature.

g. Valve shall be sized to produce a full flow pressure drop approximately 1.5 times the

full flow pressure drop of the unit by-passed, unless noted otherwise.

h. Valve analogue signal to be 2-10 vdc or 4-20m A.

i. Valves should be selected to withstand system pressure and operate at the selected

pump pressure.


14 of 15

4.5.2 Motorized Control Valves – Type C

Motorized Control Valve shall be low voltage, 2-way, 2-position, providing open-closed control

of water flow through operation of motor actuator and valve linkage in response to signal from

an on-off switch. To have the following features:

a. single seated valve, straight-through pattern; screwed end connections, bronze body

and removable brass seat on 15 to 40 mm sizes; flanged end connections, cast iron

body and removable bronze seat on 50 to 80 mm sizes; stainless steel stem and

composition disc with removable throttling plugs.

b. reversing type motor, with oil-immersed gear train, die-cast aluminium case, dual

stroke (90 and 160 degrees), double-ended crankshaft and die-cast aluminium cover

with built-in transformer.

c. linkage directly mounted on motor, without adjustment requirements and comprising

roller, slide mechanism, cam and stem position indicator and with 160 lb. seal-off

force

d. valve rated 240 deg. F maximum water temperature and 125 psi maximum pressure

for flanged end connections and 150 psi for screwed end connections.

e. motor rated 125 deg. F maximum ambient temperature.

f. Valve shall be sized to produce a full flow pressure drop approximately 1.5 times the

full flow pressure drop of the unit by-passed, unless noted otherwise.

g. valve analogue signal to be 2-10 vdc or 4-20m A.

h. Valves should be selected to withstand system pressure and operate at the selected

pump pressure.

4.5.3 CONTROL MOTOR (Actuator)

a. for valves and dampers specifications.

b. Electric, reversible, spring-return, proportional type complete with linkage.

c. Suitable for damper and motorized valve operation.

d. Shall be sized to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating

action or two-position action as specified.

e. Damper actuator shall be suitable for 220/50 Hz power supply.


Stand-alone control units and accessories, input and output devices, valve operators and sensors shall be the number of sets actually installed and accepted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.


15 of 15




******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 - Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications BMS Instrumentation

1 of 14

SECTION 15972 - BMS INSTRUMENTATION

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

a. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein.

b. Provide all labor, materials, products, equipment and services to supply, install, wire calibrate and commission the electronic control and monitoring system instrumentation as specified in the point schedules, in this specification and as required to make a complete and functional system.

c. Coordinate instrumentation provisions with the BMS equipment specified in Section 16965.

2.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

a. Instrumentation work shall be performed by one firm specializing in the installation of control systems for building environmental control or by the qualified BMS installer.

b. Products referenced under this Section establish the minimum acceptable standards of

product quality, features and performance. Products provided under this Section shall be provided by the same supplier as the BMS system.

c. Engineer in-charge supervising the work shall be a duly Registered Electronics Engineer as

required by R.A 9292 and revised National Building Code or as Registered Professional Mechanical Engineer experienced in BMS for HVAC System Application (R.A.8495).

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 RELATED WORK

a. Where the application of any special software package requires additional instrumentation to meet the requirements specified, provide the necessary instrumentation at no additional cost whether or not such instrumentation is identified.

b. Any required additional instrumentation shall meet the requirements of this Section. Submit

details for review prior to installation.

c. Provide actuators and terminal unit controller for all VAV, constant volume controllers, fan coil units and other terminal devices. Where possible, have actuators and controls installed in the terminal unit manufacturer’s factory.

2.2 PRESSURE TO CURRENT TRANSMITTERS

a. Provide pressure to current transmitters, Instrument Code C1 having the following minimum specifications:


2 of 14

(1) Internal materials of the transducer suitable for continuous contact with the applicable media.

(2) Output signal of 420 mA.

(3) Output variation of less than 0.2% full scale for supply voltage variations of 10%.

(4) Combined non-linearity, repeatability and hysteresis effects not to exceed 0.5% of full scale output over entire range.

(5) Integral, accessible zero and span adjustments.

(6) Operating temperature range of -10 to 50 deg C with 5% to 90% RH non-condensing.

(7) Temperature effect of 1.5% full scale 50 deg. C or less.

(8) over pressure input protection to a minimum of twice maximum working input pressure.

(9) Output short circuit and open circuit protection.

(10) Dustproof housing.

(11) Shock and vibration protection.

2.3 ELECTRONIC PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS

a. Provide current to pneumatic transducers, Instrument Code C2 with the following minimum specifications:

(1) Input range suitable for interfacing to the digital to analog converter output of the DDC controller.

(2) Directly proportioned output range as appropriate for modulation of the controlled device.

(3) Output air capacity of 0.27 L/s maximum.

(4) Combined non-linearity repeatability and hysteresis effects not to exceed 2% of span.

(5) Span adjustment of 14 to 140 kPa.

(6) Short circuit protection.

(7) Response time 60 seconds for final stability.

2.4 PRESSURE ELECTRIC SWITCHES a. Provide SPDT snap acting switch, Instrument: Code C4 rated for 8 amperes at 220V.

b. The pressure range shall be 0 to 130 kPa.

c. Provide adjustable set point from 20.6 to 130 kPa and the differential adjustable between

12.7 and 41.1 kPa.

2.5 MOTOR CONTROL RELAYS a. Provide motor start/stop control relays, Instrument Type D1 in dustproof housing.


3 of 14

b. Provide pick up rating and time and hold rating as required for individual applications. c. Provide motor control relays from one manufacturer. d. Provide input operating voltage to be compatible with the BMS digital output equipment. e. Where hand/off/auto (HOA) switches are provided on the MCC, the BMS digital output

shall control the motor only in the auto position.

f. Do not override other interlocks providing safety control. g. Provide shock and vibration protection. h. Provide required wiring interconnections between the motor control relays and the motor

starters.

2.6 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS AND RELAYS

a. Provide current transformers and relays, Instrument Code D2 to indicate motor status.

b. Provide SPDT output relay suitable for sensing by the BMS digital input subsystem. c. Provide output relay with trip adjustment, field accessible, over 0-100% of range. Dead band adjustment shall be to, at maximum, 10% of range. d. Long term setting drift of current transformer and relay combination not to exceed 5% full

range/6 months. e. Provide current transformer and relay with over current and over voltage protection. f. Operating ambient temperature range of -10 deg C to plus 50 deg C with 5% to 90% RH

non-condensing.

2.7 MOTOR STATUS CONTACTS

a. Provide status inputs, Instrument Code D3 for all motors using auxiliary contacts from motor starters where available or from auxiliary relays wired into the motor starter circuit.

2.8 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES

a. Select the differential pressure range of the switch, Instrument Code D4 to suit the application.

b. Provide switch with adjustable set point.

c. Provide switch with SPDT contacts rated at 5 amperes at 220V AC.

d. Mount the switch with diaphragm in a vertical plane.

e. Indicate flow for pumps and fans by means of a current sensitive relay which opens an electrical contact as differential pressure falls below pre-adjusted pressure range setting.


4 of 14

2.9 DAMPER OPERATORS - ELECTRIC

a. Provide dumper operators for all motorized dampers, including those supplied under other sections of this Specification including smoke, combination fire and smoke, factory fabricated air handling units, exhausters, and terminal control units.

b. Select and size electric damper operators. Actuator shall operate on 2-10VDC, 4-20ma

DC, 220 volt, or an increase/decrease signal. Provide power to operators from closest source.

c. Securely mount each damper operator on a rigid bracket. Mount each damper operator

outside of air stream in a readily accessible location. Damper operators may be installed in walk in type plenums where design minimum mixed air temperature is not less than 2 deg C.

d. Provide electric damper operators and linkage for inlet vane control. Select operators to

ensure adequate torque for proper operation. e. Provide electrically powered damper operators in Emergency Generator Rooms. Connect

to the emergency power system. f. Operators for VPIM fans will be supplied with that equipment.

2.10 MOTORIZED DAMPERS

a. Supply control dampers of the types and sizes required by the systems. For those dampers not supplied under this Section, obtain information which is required to interface with control system from supplier.

b. Supply opposed and parallel blade action dampers. Where design minimum outdoor

temperature is -4 deg C or lower, outdoor and relief damper leakage rate shall not exceed 11 cfm/ft5 at 3 inches wg. (96 1/s/m5 at 745Pa) for parallel blade dampers.

c. Supply opposed blade dampers for two position control and parallel blade for mixing

control of outside and return air. d. Damper frames shall be formed channels of not less than 13 gauge galvanized steel or

extruded aluminium with mounting holes for enclosed duct mounting. e. Damper blades shall be of not less than 16 gauge galvanized steel or extruded aluminium.

Blades on multi blade dampers shall not exceed 200 mm in width and 1200mm in length. f. Blade shaft bearings shall be corrosion resistant and constructed of oil impregnated

sintered bronze or nylon. g. Ensure tight seal when dampers are closed. Provide fire retardant synthetic seals on

damper blade edges and on the top and bottom. Provide stainless steel jamb seals. Leakage shall be less than 1% of the maximum air flow rate specified for the application. When subjected to 1000Pa differential pressure except as specified elsewhere.

h. Provide dampers suitable for operation within the temperature range of -26.1 deg C to 93.3 deg C.


5 of 14

i. Provide corrosion resistant zinc plated steel and brass blade linkage hardware. Secure blades to zinc plated shafts with zinc plated bolts and nuts.

j. Prepare and submit for review, detailed Shop Drawings of motorized damper assembles

showing modular arrangement of dampers, operators and structural framing.

2.11 DAMPER STATUS SWITCH

a. Provide magnetic reed switch type damper status switches activated by damper blade. Mount securely on damper frames. Instrument Code C6.

b. Provide SPDT switches with contract rating of not less than 5 amperes at 220V AC.

2.12 FILTER GAUGES

a. Filter gauges are provided by Division 15.

2.13 LEVEL SWITCHES

a. Float type, tank mounted SPDT switch action, suitable for water up to 100 deg C.

b. Float type, pit mounted SPDT switch action, suitable for water up to 100 deg C. Instrument Code D6.

2.14 LEVEL SENSOR

a. Capacitive level sensor, equal to MAgnatrol, complete with sensor rods, water tight enclosure, continuous 2-10V or 4-20 mA output. Instrument Code D7.

2.15 GAS DETECTORS

a. Provide detectors suitable for carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, and refrigerant and ammonia detection. Instrument Code K6.

b. Provide electronic detectors, with scale range and set points suitable for the gas being detected and in compliance with legislation for hazardous gasses.

c. Provide digital or continuous 2-10 VDC or 4-20mA input to BMS as appropriate for detection and control.

2.16 INTERFACE CONTACTS AND CONTROL

a. Snap acting switch, rated for 5 amps at 220 VAC, or digital input. Instrument Code F1 to F3.

b. ensure contacts and signal are compatible with BMS and other systems being interfaced.


6 of 14

c. Provide 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA output from BMS to variable speed drives or air flow volume control devices. Instrument Code C7.

d. Provide pulse totalizing and conversion from building power meters. Instrument Code C8.

(1) Power meter consists of CT’s and PT’s. Provide accuracy equal to that of the utility meter.

(2) Provide time based measurement with intervals of, at minimum 1 minute, for power demand control.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

a. Meet applicable codes, each manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures and Division 16 requirements.

b. Install all equipment so as to be mechanically stable and allow easy access. Fix as

necessary to wall or floor. Provide anti-vibration mounting where required to properly isolate the equipment.

c. Install all equipment in locations providing adequate ambient conditions for its specified

functioning, allowing for adequate ventilation.

d. Provide complete shop drawings for review.

e. Review proposed location of any equipment with Owner prior to its installation.

f. Where the point schedules indicate auxiliary contact provision, provide all instrumentation, wiring, conduit, power supplies and services as required to integrate these points into the BMS.

g. Provide interposing and motor control relays at the local item of equipment or at the

associated MCC as applicable. Provide all relays, wiring, conduit, power supplies and services as required to integrate these points into the BMS.

h. Wire all equipment which is part of the same control loop to the same field panel.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

a. Provide for each piece of instrumentation and end device, a 50 mm x 75 mm plastic nameplate embossed to indicate the following:

(1) Mnemonic for point

(2) Remote field panel and termination (3) English language description (4) Field panel


7 of 14

3.3 WIRING

a. Provide all wiring required for Instrumentation. Install in IMC conduit, and otherwise comply with Division 16 requirements. Approved plenum cable wire may be used where allowed by code.

b. Provide power wiring from nearest emergency powered panel to each field device as

required. c. Provide necessary relays required to interconnect equipment. d. Install wiring parallel and perpendicular to building planes.

3.4 FACTORY BUILT EQUIPMENT

a. Factory built equipment such as roof top air conditioners, make up air units. VAV terminals, water source heat pumps, etc., require control devices supplied by this Section, refer to individual Specification Sections for exact requirements.

b. Provide all required components to completely interface with the BMS, including relays,

actuators, thermostats, terminal control units and other devices to make a complete and operational system.

c. Install thermostats and control wiring for equipment where thermostats are factory

supplied.

3.5 WARNING NOTICES

a. Place warning notices at the MCC Panel, local starter and on or close to all motors under BMS control.

b. Make the notices conspicuous with bold lettering to advise that the motor is under BMS

control and may start at any time without warning. Submit sample notice for review prior to installation.


8 of 14

3.6 LEVELS OF BMS PERFORMANCE TESTING

L

Fig.4.3.3.2.2 – Levels of BMS Performance Testing

(ii) Preliminary check

All major components are installed in accordance with the drawings.

(iii) Electrical Supply & Batteries

To check for correct power supply to the CCMS

(iv) Visual/Physical inspection

The contractor shall submit a checklist but not limited to the following for visual checking:

1. BMS wiring;

Level 3 – Building Zone

Test: Zones Building

Test: Temperature Humidity Light Carbon dioxide Ventilation rate Energy consumption










Level 2 – Sub-system and

Test: Chillers Air handling units Any systems/equipment Specified in the Contract

Test: Systems response to Inputs Control loops Sequencing

Level 1 – Component

Test: Analogue inputs

Temperature sensors Humidity sensors Pressure sensors Voltage Current Flowrate

Digital inputs

Relays Switches

Analogue outputs

Actuators Digital Outputs

Relays

Test for:

Accuracy Operation Alarms Address


9 of 14

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N N

N

N

START

Is there a feedback signal for the DO?

Does the feedback signal give correct

indication?

All completed?

END

Is there an input to monitor the effect of

the DO?

Does this input give correct indication of

the operation of DO?

Does a visual check indicate

correct operation of DO?

Next DO

Set switch to auto

Is CCMS DO relay operating?

Is CCMS hand/off/auto on auto?

Is DO overridden?

Check reason for overridden

Delete override if not

required

Is controller relay operating?

Check device under control

Check controller

Rectify fault

Is DO interlocked?

Check strategy configuration

Check reason for interlock

Delete if not required

Repeat test

Fig.2 Digital output (DO) checking flow chart


10 of 14

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y Y

Y Y

Y

Y

Fig. 3 Analogue output (AO) Checking flow chart

START

Is there a feedback signal for the AO?

Does the feedback signal give correct

indication?

All completed?

END

Is there an input to monitor the effect of

the AO?

Does this input give correct indication of the operation of AO?

Does a visual check indicate correct

operation of AO?

Next AO

Is CCMS AO indicator lamp show correct operation of AO?

Is CCMS hand/off/auto on

auto?

Repeat test

Check why not on auto

Set switch to auto

Set switch to auto

Is device hand/off/auto

on auto?

Is controlled device ON i.e. power supply? Relay operating?

Is AO overridden?

Check reason for override

Is AO interlocked?

Check reason for interlock

Delete if not required

Check strategy

configuration


11 of 14

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Fig.4 Alarm checking flow chart

Put power on to device

Check device under control

Delete override if not

required

START

Alarm levels, dead bands, time

delays as specified?

Set correct levels, dead bands, delays

Check consequences of forcing an alarm

Is it safe to force an alarm?

Adjust alarm level to force alarm

Is alarm message category destination

correct?




Is it safe to force an alarm?

END

Is alarm enabled?

Enable alarm

Set correct alarm message destination etc.


12 of 14

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Fig.5 Control loop checking flow chart

START

Set up log for control variable

Check control loop stability

Is response steady?

Alter set point

Log change in controlled variable over time

Is finally steady state response similar to set

point?

Is response steady?

Complete checklist

Next loop

Tune loop setting gain integral & derivative values

Repeat test

Is control plant operating

efficiently?

Log change in controlled variable over time

Repeat test

Repair plant

All completed? steady?

END

Tune loop


13 of 14

List of Calibrated Instrument Necessary for the T & C works

Note: * Delete if not applicable

Type Model Serial No. of Instrument Date of Calibration


14 of 14

Tested / Checked by : (Name of contractor’s Representative)

Signature – ( )

Post:

Witnessed by: (Name(s) of *PBSE/PBSI)

Signature – ( )

Tel. No.:

Date : Post: Tel. No.: Date :

******

Post: Tel. No.: Date : Post: Tel. No.: Date :

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 - Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications BMS Inspection and Acceptance Testing

1 of 13

SECTION 15973 - BMS INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

a. Comply with Division 1, General Requirements and all documents referred to therein.

b. Provide all labor, materials, products, equipment and services to demonstrate to the Owner and the Consultant, which the equipment, networks, installations, programs and services supplied, installed and tested under this Contract meet the requirements of the Contract Documents in all respects.

c. Engineer in-charge supervising the work shall be a duly Registered Electronics Engineer as

required by R.A. 9292 and revised National Building Code or as Registered Professional Mechanical Engineer experienced in BMS for HVAC System Application (R.A.8495).

1.2 SPECIAL TESTING AND USE OF EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE TESTING

a. The Owner/Consultant reserves the right to use any piece of equipment, device or material installed under this Contract for such reasonable lengths of time and at such times as they may require to make complete and thorough tests of same before undertaking the final acceptance testing. Do not construe such tests as evidence of acceptance of any part of the contract. No claim for damage will be made by the Contractor for any injury or breakage to any parts of the above due to the aforementioned tests where caused by weakness or inaccuracy of the parts or by defective materials or workmanship of any kind whatsoever.

b. Conduct such operation following prior agreement between the Owner/Consultant and the

Contractor as to the format and scheduling of the tests.

c. Arrange work to enable the Owner to change over local air handler control systems to the new system for extended operating periods to ensure proper functioning of software and hardware.

d. Do not withhold consent to the execution of such operation when reasonably requested by

the Owner/Consultant.

e. Make BMS available for the use of the Owner once the individual work items are such that they can be used for their intended function(s) as detailed herein.

f. The warranty period shall not commence until the Owner’s Certificate of substantial

Completion is issued.

g. The Owner and/or Consultant reserve the right to defer acceptance testing on any item until all work included in this Contract has been completed by the Contractor or can be fully tested.

h. Draft documentation must be provided before acceptance testing will emmence.

PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST PROVISIONS

a. Provide all equipment, software, consumable items, personnel and facilities as required to reasonably execute any factory or site acceptance tests, including any signal simulation equipment.


2 of 13

2.2 DOCUMENTATION

a. Submit preliminary as-built drawings and documentation at least 4 weeks prior to the commencement of final acceptance testing. The intent is that this documentation may be used by the Owner and Consultant during the execution of the final acceptance testing.

b. Submit data relevant to point index, functions, limits, sequences, interlocks, software

routines and associated parameters and other pertinent information for the operating system and data base.

c. Submit point log sheets to the Consultant at least 4 weeks prior to the test. Submit sample

point log sheets for Consultant review prior to completion and final data entry.

d. Submit for acceptance by the Consultant, a total demonstration test plan before commencement of each test/ inspection. All hardware and software system components and all other work items shall be fully tested/inspected during the demonstration.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING

a. Perform a complete demonstration of the BMS real-time responsibilities of surveillance and command prior to online operation.

b. Advise the Consultant and Owner, in writing, at least 2 weeks in advance of readiness to

perform tests.

c. Note deficiencies and correct before starting and continuing tests. Perform calibration and operational checks prior to the commencement of final acceptance testing for all relevant system parts.

d. Perform final acceptance testing all the following defined levels:

(1) per points basis (2) per system basis (3) Software functions and packages basis (4) per building basis (5) Total BMS basis

e. Make available on site for the duration of these tests, all installation, engineering, software, system and personnel, required to enable test completion.

f. Demonstrate the specified performance of the BMS software and hardware, at all levels

from individual end devices through to total system operation and the proper operation/undertaking of all other items of work performed under this Contract.

g. Specifically orient acceptance test procedures to demonstrate the satisfactory operation of

aspects of the operator interface terminals.

h. Perform a complete and detailed calibration and operational check for each individual BMS point and control function contained within the supplied system. Check to ensure that all equipment, software, network elements, modules and circuits provided are functioning to meet the Specification and record on log sheets.


3 of 13

i. Repeat acceptance testing until acceptable performance has been established.

3.2 FACTORY TESTING

a. Factory testing of hardware or software shall not replace, in whole or in part, site acceptance testing as detailed in this Section.

b. Submit for Consultant review, proposed format of factory tests.

PART 4 – PRE- START –UP / PRE – COMMISIONING CHECKS (BMS)

It is important for a testing and commissioning to have a pre-start check or a pre-commissioning check, to lessen errors and faults. This is done by the BMS Engineering before the functional test.

4.1 PRE-START CHECKS

4.1.1 Filled up all necessary Safety requirement forms.

4.1.2 Complete all the tools and equipments below necessary to do the testing and commissioning:

a. Tester / Volt-Ohm Meter

b. Pliers, Long Nose, and Wire Cutter

c. Flat and Philips Screw Driver

d. Radio (Walkie-Talkie)

e. Ladder

4.1.3 To proceed in a BMS testing and commissioning, work permit is needed when working in a closed area or in a shaft.

4.1.4 All approved relevant BMS data gathering panel design and BMS shop drawings like single-line diagram, NAE riser, database and floor plan to locate the device.

4.1.5 BMS testing and commissioning checklists of the field devices

4.1.6 Verify that all interfacing / integration requirements are installed & tested in either cases whether it is hardwired or high level thru communication.

4.2 Pre-Commissioning Checks

4.2.1 Visual inspection to ensure that all equipment are installed as per drawings and specifications, and complies with all relevant codes and practices.

4.2.2 Checking of Riser Cable

a. Continuity Test

b. Tagging / Labelling at both ends

c. Proper termination to the cabinet

4.2.3 Checking of Wire for Communication Bus

a. Continuity Test




4 of 13

4.2.4 Checking of Wire for Field Controller Bus

a. Continuity Test



4.2.5 Checking of Horizontal Wire

a. Continuity Test

b. Tagging / Labelling at both ends or devices

c. Proper termination to the BMS Cabinet

d. Proper designation of cables to the devices

4.2.6 Point to point checking/ inspection of DDC panel if properly/ correctly installed.

PART 5 - TESTING PROCEDURES

There’s a lot of testing procedure for Building Management System. All items should be considered for testing, to ensure functionality of the system.

5.1 TOOLS / EQUIPMENTS

Testing devices for the BMS is used to test all the equipments, devices and cables in the system. Such testing devices are listed below:

5.1.1 Tester/ Volt-Ohm Meter

Tester is used to test the line connection of wires. It is also used for continuity testing, to determine if the line is shorted or has an open connection.

5.1.2 Pliers, Long Nose, and Wire Cutter

The pliers, long nose and wire cutters are use to fix the connectivity of the wires to different wires and to the device and/or equipment.

5.1.3 Flat and Philips screw driver

Set of screw drivers are necessary to connect the cires and cables to the device and / or equipment.

5.1.4 Radio (Walkie-Talkie)

Walkie Talkies are used by the commissioning agents to communicate during testing especially when the engineers are in the room where the BMS Cabinet is located and the technicians are in the field devices.

5.1.5 Ladder

Ladder is used by commissioning agents or helper to check the devices installed on ceiling or highly elevated devices.


5 of 13

5.2 WIRE TESTING

5.2.1 Riser Wiring

a. The TF wires will be from the Network Automation Engine to the topmost level of the building passing through the pull boxes in every floor/ level where the termination of horizontal wires takes place.

b. The TF wires will then be tested using a continuity tester (an LED and sounder tester)

or a VOM (Volt/ Ohm Meter Tester). This is the initial test that is being performed to see to it that the cables are not shorted or grounded. This will facilitate the commissioning engineers a better and faster commissioning of the Building Management System. It is very important to tag the “IN” and “out” cables since this is very important during commissioning.

5.3 BMS CABINET TESTING

Termination of wires with the Addressable Network Automation Engine and Direct Digital Controllers will be done by engineer at the same time designed the program for the Building Management System. It will be easier if the one who made the program will also be the one to terminate from the cabinet to avoid such errors because the termination depends from the downloaded program. Termination at the BMS Cabinet is as simple as the termination of building management devices to the appropriate groupings of cabinet.

5.3.1 Power Testing

All FEC, IOM, and NAE’s are 24VAC supplied. A step-down transformer (230VAC to 24VAC) is installed in every DDC / NAE panel to supply a 24VAC to the controllers. Before switching on the power the following are conducted to ensure power safety.

a. Make sure that power is stable and functional

b. Use a multimeter to check the main power (220VAC-230VAC)

c. Check the step-down power in the transformer (24VAC) using multimeter

5.4 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SERVER

Termination of wires and networking of the Building Management System Server will be done by engineer at the same time designed the program for the Building Management System. And it will be easier if the one who made the program will also be the one to terminate from the cabinet to avoid such errors because the termination depends from the downloaded program. The Building Management System Engineer should be assisted by the Network Administration of the Sub-Contractor for the Networking requirements.

5.4.1 Graphics Testing

The field device and exact location of the field device on testing should automatically be shown on the monitor of server. The address and location name of the controllers and devices on testing should be indicated on the screen while its icon is blinking.

5.4.2 Database Recording

The alarm generated on the BMS Cabinet will be automatically recorded on the database of the Building Management System Server.


6 of 13

5.5 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CLIENT WORKSTATION

Termination of wires and networking of the Building Management System Client Workstation will be done by engineer at the same time designed the program for the building Management System. And it will be easier if the one who made the program will also be the one to terminate from the cabinet to avoid such errors because the termination depends from the downloaded program. The Building Management System Engineer should be assisted by the Network Administration of the Sub-Contractor for the Networking requirements.

5.5.1 The field device and exact location of the field device on testing should automatically be shown on the monitor of server. The address and location name of the controllers and devices on testing should be indicated on the screen while its icon is blinking.

5.6 PROGRAMMING OF THE SYSTEM

The system programming will be done by the systems engineer knowledgeable and in-charge on Building Management Systems. On this method, the Systems Engineer will make a program of the whole system by configuring all the devices and addresses that will operate depending on the design and specification requirements. The NAE Program via RJ45 will do this thru PC. The programming and configuration will be in conjunction with the Building Management Device Location and Address.

5.7 FIELD CONTROLLER TESTING

After all the devices are installed and connected to the controllers, including the configuration and programming since our controllers is an addressable Direct Digital Controller, the system is ready for testing. During testing and commissioning, proper testing of each of the devices will be implemented as follows:

5.2.1 Binary Input

a. Choose one point.

b. If the point is operational (ex: auto/ manual switch that can be rotated) then physically

alternate its state from the field.

c. Check on the workstation monitor if any value is alternating state.

d. If yes, check that the software name of this software point coincides with the field

point we are testing.

e. If the point indication is impossible to change, it can be simulated manually (this is

done in general for all faults and alarms) and the same steps ( 3 & 4 ) are continued.

f. If the point is not operational, simulate a binary switch at the unit and label ‘Not

Operational”.

5.2.2 Binary Output

a. Verify proper interfacing device is installed. (e.g. Relay)

b. With power OFF at controlled devices, ensure the interfacing device responds to a

Software / Manual command.


7 of 13

5.2.3 Analogue Input

a. Measure the actual input variable.

b. Check the value read on the commissioning tool, and verify that it corresponds to the measured one.

c. Check that the unit on the commissioning software point is matching the parameter

we are checking.

d. Check that the input we are reading has a logical sense and does not fall out of common sense range.

5.2.4 Analogue Output

a. Check that the unit on the commissioning software point is matching the parameter

we are checking.

b. Send multiple different outputs.

c. Verify that the connected device is physically responding according to each output

sent.

d. Calibrate the device if needed (in our case all valves, tested and calibrated prior to they use on site).

e. If the connected device has a feedback, then check that the feedback of the device corresponds with the output sent.

5.2.5 Duct Temperature Sensor

a. Make sure that the sensor is installed, check installed on the checklist.

b. Verify the sensor reading, by comparing the temperature read on the fronted tool and the resistance measured on the terminal block by the voltmeter. Use the table below (Figure-2: nominal temperature vs. resistance) to check the matching.


8 of 13

2.2k 10k-50 -46 674.00 821.00 109,905.00 489,981.00-40 -40 699.00 843.00 75,487.00 366,185.00-30 -34 725.00 865.00 52,584.00 233,990.00-20 -29 752.00 887.00 37,123.00 1,665,085.00-10 -23 777.00 908.00 26,544.00 117,978.000 -18 803.00 930.00 19,210.00 85,349.0010 -12 830.00 952.00 14,063.00 62,464.0020 -7 858.00 974.00 10,408.00 46,221.0030 -1 885.00 996.00 7,783.00 34,562.0040 4 914.00 1,017.00 5,879.00 26,103.0050 10 942.00 1,039.00 4,482.00 19,903.0060 16 971.00 1,061.00 3,449.00 15,313.0070 21 1,000.00 1,082.00 2,676.00 11,883.0080 27 1,030.00 1,104.00 2,049.00 9,298.0090 32 1,060.00 1,125.00 1,651.00 7,333.00

100 38 1,090.00 1,147.00 1,312.00 5,872.00110 43 1,121.00 1,168.00 1,050.00 4,663.00120 49 1,152.00 1,190.00 846.00 3,757.00130 54 1,184.00 1,211.00 686.00 3,048.00140 60 1,216.00 1,232.00 560.00 2,488.00150 66 1,248.00 1,254.00 460.00 2,043.00160 71 1,281.00 1,275.00 380.00 1,687.00170 77 1,314.00 1,296.00 315.00 1,401.00180 82 1,348.00 1,317.00 263.00 1,170.00190 88 1,382.00 1,339.00 221.00 982.00200 93 1,417.00 1,360.00 186.00 828.00210 99 1,452.00 1,381.00 158.00 701.00220 104 1,487.00 1,402.00 134.00 597.00

Temperature Thermistor

Resistance (ohms)

°F °C Ni Pt*

Table 7. Nominal Temperature vs. Resistance

5.2.6 Differential Pressure Switch

a. Make sure that the sensor is installed, check installed on the checklist. \

b. With the relevant fan running adjust the pressure set point of the differential pressure switch until the contacts close. Turn off the fan and check the contacts have opened.

c. Cycle the differential pressure switch two and three times by operating the fan on and off and each time check the switch contacts have opened and closed appropriately.

5.2.7 Dirty Filter Alarm



9 of 13

b. Set the differential pressure switch to the setting given by the customer for “filter dirty” condition. Check that switching occurs at the set differential pressure (between 10 to 30% of the scale range).

c. Recalibrate if necessary.

5.2.8 Damper Control ( Open / Close Control )


b. Check the Actuator and Damper are correctly assembled.

c. Set damper end switch positions and verify operation.

5.2.9 Carbon Monoxide Sensor


b. Test each CO Detector for Proper Function.

c. To confirm that a digital readout CO detector is detecting carbon monoxide, test it with a substance that will detect low levels of the gas, such as a lit cigarette or a lit incense wand. As you move the cigarette or wand within 8 inches of the CO detector, the digital display should change to register the presence of carbon monoxide.

5.2.10 Duct Smoke Alarm Sensor

a. The built-in test feature, i.e., the test magnet, test switch, etc., should be performed. These features are designed to meet the intent of the NFPA and Underwriters Laboratories functional test requirements, to electronically or mechanically simulate gray smoke, not to exceed 6%/ft. obscuration. This will assure the detector is operable and will respond to minimum smoke requirements.

b. When attempting to verify that the detector will respond to smoke in the duct airflow, the pressure differential should be measured across the sampling tubes (exhaust & intake) using a manometer.

c. Next, apply smoke directly to the detector head to initiate an alarm. The sampling and exhaust tubes may need to be blocked off for this test and then reopened afterwards.

5.3 PROGRAMMING TESTING

Programming for Building Management System of Globe Telecom Headquarters includes programming of DDC and programming of front end equipment. The following items should be observed before we can commission the programs.

a. Make sure that all DDC’s and NAE’s are all power up.

b. All listed on the pre-commission checklist should be inspected and done (refer to 4.2

Pre-Commissioning Check).

c. In the workstation, log-in username and password (see Figure 7).

d. A certain DDC accumulate the CAF file name of the program.

e. Point to point checking of points list per floor shall be conducted, to make sure that there is no single point was missed.

f. In the main page of the graphics user interface, tests click all command buttons, to check if all buttons will respond to its correct description.


10 of 13

g. All items should be recorded in the program testing form, (see Appendix 5).

PART 6 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

Sequence of operation listed below are all based on the specification and construction bulletin issued by the consultant / designer.

6.1 AIR HANDLING UNIT

a. In automode, system is energized by local control (DDC).

b. In manual mode, each equipment is started or stopped manually

c. When airflow is established as sensed by Air Flow Switch, control system is

activated.

d. Supply air temp. Sensor shall modulate the chilled water control valve CV-1 in proportion to the cooling demand. The control valve shall be closed when AHU operation is stopped.

e. CO2 transmitter installed on the return duct shall modulate the motorized damper MD to meet the desired CO2 concentration level.

f. Smoke detector SD in AHU shall de-energize system and provide signal to fire alarm panel upon sensing products of combustion.

VAV control thru duct static pressure sensor Variable Air Volume

(1) (VAV) terminals throttle to maintain the desired room temperature based on the resulting increase in duct static pressure as sensed by Static Pressure Sensor (SPS), the vsd slows down the AHU fan to maintain the desired static pressure setting. Upon increase in demand for cooling, the VAV terminals modulates to open position, thereby decreasing the duct static pressure and causes the VSD to speed up the AHU fan.

(2) The AHU motor speed shall be modulated by the DDC thru the VSD to

maintain the duct static pressure, as measured by the static pressure sensor at the supply air duct, at a pre-defined set point, whenever the VSD is in the “auto” mode. The duct static pressure set point is user adjustable from 250-750 Pa (1-3 inches of water).

(3) The DDC shall set the speed to 40% when the AHU status is “off” as

indicated by the status contact from the VSD of the AHU motor.

6.2 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME

a. Temperature sensor T senses room temperature in individual spaces from no cooling to full cooling and send signal to DDC.

(1) The programmed set point temperature shall command VAV motorized damper to modulate to maintain temperature set point within the space.

(2) When switch button located adjacent to VAV box is pushed, DDC control set point shall be overriden. The slider control shall act as a manual set point which will control VAV damper position.

(3) After a pre-determined time of two (2) hours, the DDC set point shall override the manual setting and shall govern the operation of the VAV damper.


11 of 13

6.3 JET FAN

1. In the event the Carbon Monoxide (CO) sensor detect a concentration of 50ppm at any sample point in any of the Car Park Zone Area, the corresponding main extract and supply fan will operate and run at normal speed.

2. Simultaneously, the corresponding group of Jet Fans in the detected zone will be actuated at low speed to dilute the “CO” concentration and push them toward the extract point.

3. Once the “CO” sensor detect the concentration is reduced to about 20ppm, the above main fans and Jet Fans will shut down.

4. In periods when the underground car park area temperature rises to about 35°C, the temperature sensor will signal the main supply and extract fan to run simultaneously at a specified low speed. When the surrounding temperature is decreased to about 28°C, the temperature sensor will signal the main fans to shut down.

5. The main extract and supply fan shall be Variable Speed Drive whereas the jet fan shall be two (2) speeds. Activation of these fans shall be in conjunction with the zoned “CO” sensors and temperature sensors.

ON FIRE MODE (FIRE CONDITION):

(i) In the event of fire detection thru Heat Detectors and after a pre-set stand still escape period, the Jet Fans in the fire area / level will be activated and will run at full speed to quickly and effectively clear the smoke. Simultaneously, the Jet Fans in all other levels will be switched off.

(ii) The main supply and extract fans will simultaneously switch into smoke and extract mode immediately.

(iii) All fans activated in the smoke extract zones will automatically run in the pre-set fan high speed and direction of extraction points.

(iv) The smoke purging will continue until such time the fire marshal declared that the parking area on fire is already smoke-free.

(v) Visual and audible alarm mode shall be indicated in the BMS and the car park ventilation / smoke extract control panel. Mute switch shall be provided to silence the alarm.

(vi) After the emergency condition is over, the system shall be restored to normal mode thru a “System Store” switch.

6.4 STAIRWELL PRESSURIZATION FAN

a. Upon receiving a fire signal, SPF shall automatically run.

b. The Variable Speed Fan shall maintain a pressure differential of 25-50 Pa between the stairway and the adjacent corridor. This differential pressure shall be monitored in the BMS thru the differential pressure transmitter DPT.

c. Smoke detector in PAU shall de-energize system and provide signal to Fire Alarm Panel upon sensing products of combustion.

6.5 KITCHEN EXHAUST FAN

a. Fan is started and stopped manually or on a time schedule through the DDC

b. Control system shall monitor fan on-off status and fan motor Alarm / Trip Status. KEF is interlocked with KSF


12 of 13

6.6 PAHU, CO2 SENSOR, VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME

a. In auto mode, system is monitored and controlled by DDC.

b. In manual mode, PAHU is started or stopped manually.

c. When airflow is established as sensed by Air Flow Switch (AFS), the control system is activated.

d. The pre-cooled supply air temperature sensor set at 23°C shall modulate the chilled water control valve (say CV-1). The control valve CV-1 shall be closed when PAHU operation is stopped.

e. The CO2 transmitter installed on the return air duct of the AHU shall modulate the motorized damper (MD) installed on the AHU’s fresh air duct from PAHU to meet the desired CO2 concentration level in the office area.

f. The VFD will control the fan speed of the PAHU based on the resulting increase / decrease in duct static pressure as sensed by the static pressure sensor (SPS) / transmitter mounted on a point 2/3 of the length of the main PAHU supply air duct.

g. Upon increase (or decrease) in demand for fresh air as signalled by the CO2 transmitter, the MD modulates to open (or closed) position thereby decreasing (or increasing) the duct static pressure and causes the VFD to speed up (or slow down) the PAHU fan.

h. The Smoke Detector (SD) installed in AHU return air duct shall de-energize the system and provide signal to the fire alarm panel upon sensing products of combustion.

6.7 FUEL PUMP AND TANK

a. FP-01 served as main pump while FP-02 shall be the stand-by unit. Switching from duty to stand-by shall be automatic.

b. When the motor controller is in the auto mode, the pump shall start automatically when the low level switch is activated. The pump shall automatically stop when the high level switch is activated.

c. When the motor controller is in the manual mode, pumps can be manually started or stopped.

d. FP shall not start when fuel at storage tank is very low or the level is below the suction line.

e. Provide electronic tank gauge and leak detection system to be interfaced with BMS panel.

6.8 SMOKE EXTRACTION (SEF, GEF, MUAF, AHU)

a. NORMAL MODE

(1) The system shall be provided with Manual-Off Auto (H-0-A) selector switch. In the manual mode, each individual component can be operated manually while automatic operation is disabled. In system off mode, neither manual nor automatic operation is possible.

(2) In the auto mode, the system is started or stopped remotely thru the BMS or the local motor control panel at the AHU room.

(3) Upon start of the AHU, the pre-cooled air unit (PAU) and general exhaust fan (GEF) runs simultaneously, the ac control system is energized. The PAU automatic dampers AD-1, AD-2, AD-6 and AD-9 opens.


13 of 13

(4) The PAU and AHU chilled water control valve opens and modulates in response to discharge air temperature as sensed by the room thermostat.

(5) Pre-cooled air is supplied to the AHU as make-up air for the ventilation requirement to the office floor.

(6) Variable Speed Drive (VSD) varies the PAU fan speed in response to the Carbon Dioxide (CO2) level as sensed by the CO2 sensor located in the return duct of the AHU.

b. SMOKE EXTRACTION MODE

(1) On fire mode as sensed by the AHU return duct smoke detector, the AHU fan motor in the office on fire will shut down automatically.

(2) Upon system stop, the PAU and GEF shall stop, de-energized and shall automatically close the normally open automatic dampers AD-1, AD-2, AD-6 and AD-9.

(3) After fire sprinkler activation mode and smoke within the floor on fire were sensed, the Smoke Exhaust Fan (SEF) and Make-up Air Fan (MUAF) will run to purge the smoke. Simultaneously, the normally close dampers AD-3, AD-4, AD-7 and AD-8 will automatically open.

(4) The smoke purging will continue until such time the fire marshall declared that the floor is already smoke free.

(5) Visual and audible alarm mode shall ne indicated in the BMS and the MCP at the FCC and AHU room. Mute switch shall be provided to silence the alarm.

(6) After the emergency condition is over, the system shall be restored to normal mode thru a “system restore” switch.

PART 7 - MATERIALS USED

To completely accomplish a testing and commissioning procedure, some materials or tools should be used. These materials are:

7.1 Digital Multimeter

7.2 Screwdriver Set

7.3 Pliers

7.4 Wire Stripper

7.5 Tagging Tape & Marker

7.6 Walkie-Talkie Radio

*******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 – Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Supply and Installation of Elevators

1 of 3

SECTION 15980 - SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF ELEVATORS

1.1 Scope of Works:

The total tender price for the contract shall be for the complete installation including supply, delivery, installation, testing and putting in commission, hand over in working order and maintenance thereafter for a period of 12 months, all in accordance with the specification, scope of work and drawings.

The itemized breakdown of the lump sum tender price as listed below shall form only as an indicator of the breakdown value for this contract works. The tender shall price the contract works in accordance with the tender drawings, specification, general and preliminaries and the conditions of Contract. Tenderers are encouraged to submit their forthcoming latest equipment / module currently under research and development as alteration offer. No claim for extra or otherwise shall be considered for any trade / items / works as specified and shown in the tender drawings and specification but not described hereunder:

Item No. Description A. Passenger Elevators

1. To supply, install, test and commission Passenger / Service Elevators complete with

the following details as noted in the specifications and drawings: a. Elevator equipment including traction machines, governors, brakes, solid estate,

motor drives (ACVVVF), microprocessors and control panels, etc.

b. Car cage, car doors, landing doors, locking devices, full door height safety edges, car operating panels, car position and directional up-down indicators, return panels frames, columns, door jambs, transom panel, architraves, landing sills, etc.

c. Landing Door Finishes d. Hall equipment including hall lanterns, directional up-down indicators, and chime

units, car positions indicators, hall call buttons, etc. e. Car internal fixtures including emergency lighting fixtures, ventilation fans and

grilles, speakers, etc.

Item No. Description

f. Intercom systems for all elevators including master intercom in machine room

and all supervisory panels with nickel cadmium batteries, chargers, wirings and conduits, etc.

g. Telecom systems for each elevators cars. h. Nickel cadmium batteries, chargers and all wirings and conduits for emergency

lights and ventilation fans. i. Guides, rails and fixings, buffers, metal screen guardings, counterweights,

cables, ropes, cat ladders, chequered plates and all other necessary works in elevator shafts.

j. Electrical works and installation including panel board assemblies, starters,

protections, elevator shaft lighting outlets as well as the required interfacing devices for Fire Alarm System, BMS, etc. This will include wiring, conduits, etc.


2 of 3

k. Painting and Labelling

2. Any other works or equipment not covered by the above but are required to complete the installations as a whole as per drawings and specification.


B. General and Preliminaries

a. Mobilisation

b. Site Office & Stores

c. Insurance

d. Protection of Equipment

e. Hoisting of Equipment & Accessories to various floors

f. Central Control Console Option: Software Based Monitoring System

g. Cost of Installation

h. Shop / Working Drawings

i. As-built / Record Drawings

j. Maintenance Manual

k. Training / Tuition to Clients staff on operation of the system

l. Cost of Full Time Site Supervisor for the duration of the works

m. Cost of fixed 5-year operations & maintenance contract

n. Cost for the use of the Service Elevator during the construction.

o. Provisional cost of 24-hour Resident Technician during the first ninety (90) days of operation.

p. Provisional cost for supply of spare parts.

q. Provisional cost for the prolonged usage of the Service Elevator (rate/month)


3 of 3


C. Provisional Sum for elevator car interior finishes

D. Testing, Commissioning & Maintenance

E. Tender Price for Elevator Installation

F. Total Tender Price for Elevator Installation

******

Bicol International Airport Development Project Division 15 – Mechanical Section VI- Technical Specifications Testing and Balancing Air and Water Systems

1 of 9

SECTION 15996 - TESTING AND BALANCING AIR AND WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The provisions of Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements", apply to this section. 1.1.1 Definitions

a. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling, etc.).

b. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (sub mains, branches and

terminals) in accordance with specified design quantities. c. Procedure: Standardize approach and execution of sequence of work operations to

yield reproducible results. d. Report Forms: Test data sheets arranged for collection of test data in logical order for

submission and review. This data should also form the permanent record which shall be used as the basis for any future testing, adjusting, and balancing required.

e. Test: To determine quantities performance of equipment.

1.1.2 Submittals Submit the following:

a. Standards Compliance Testing Agency Testing Agency Personnel Professional Engineers Instrument Calibration b. Schedules Testing Agenda 1.2 TESTING AND BALANCING AGENCY 1.2.1 Air and Water Systems Testing and Balancing

Upon completion of the installation and field testing, performance test and adjust the supply, return, make-up, and exhaust air systems, and chilled, water systems to provide the air volume and water flow quantities indicated. Accomplish all work in accordance with the agenda and procedures specified under AABC 71679 and standards of the NEBB. Correct air and water system performance deficiencies disclosed by the test before balancing the systems. TAB contractor to submit checklist/ report to the Project Management Consultant before balancing the air and water systems.

1.2.2 Agency Qualifications

The Contractor, as part of this contract, shall obtain the services of a qualified testing organization to perform the testing and balancing work as herein specified. Prior to commencing work under this section of the specifications, the testing organization shall submit the TAB Organization Chart showing that a registered PME-Professional Mechanical Engineer is included to supervised and prepare the system performance report during TAB Activity and


2 of 9

Final TAB report prior to System Final Commissioning. The TAB Contractor shall report directly to the Project Management Consultant of the progress and quality of the TAB activity and final T & C – Testing and Commissioning.

1.3 AGENDA 1.3.1 Preliminary Report

Review plans and specifications prior to installation of any of the affected system. Submit a written report to the Engineer indicating any deficiencies in the system that would preclude the proper adjusting, balancing, and testing of the systems.

1.3.2 Submittal

An agenda shall be submitted and approved by the Engineer prior to start of testing and balancing work. Include the following:

a. General description of each air and water system with its associated equipment, and

operation cycles for cooling and heating. b. A complete listing of all air and water flow and air terminal measurements to be

performed. c. Specific test procedures and parameters for determining specified quantities; e.g., flow

drafts, etc., from the actual field measurements to establish compliance with contract requirements.

d. Samples of forms showing applications of procedures and calculations to typical

systems. 1.3.3 Procedure Reporting

Provide specific test procedures for measuring air quantities at terminals. Specify type of instrument to be used, method of instrument application (by sketch), and factors for:

a. Air terminal configuration

b. Flow direction (supply or exhaust)

c. Velocity corrections

d. Effective area applicable to each size and type of air terminal

1.3.4 Area and Application Factors Will not be required where pivot tubes are employed to determine terminal capacity. 1.4 PROCEDURES, GENERAL 1.4.1 Requirements

Adjust systems and components thereof that perform as required by drawings and specifications.

1.4.2 Test Duration

Operating tests of cooling coils, fans and other equipment shall be of not less than 4 hours duration, after stabilized operating conditions have been established.


3 of 9

1.4.3 Instrumentation

Method of application of instrumentation shall be in accordance with the approved agenda. Furnish all personnel, instruments, and equipment for tests specified herein.

a. Accuracy of Instruments Instruments used for measurements shall be accurate. Provide calibration histories for

each instrument for examination. Calibrate each test instrument by an approved laboratory or by the manufacturer. The Engineer has the right to request instrument recalibration, or the use of other instruments and test methodology, where accuracy or readings is questionable.

b. Application of Instruments Comply with manufacturer's certified instructions. c. Permanently-Installed Instruments Do not install permanently-installed equipment used for the tests, e.g., gages,

thermometers, etc., until just prior to the tests to avoid damage and changes in calibration.

d. Accuracy of all Thermometers Plus or minus one graduation at the temperatures to be measured. Graduations shall

conform to the following schedule:

Medium Design Temperature Differential (Deg. F.)

Maximum Graduation (Deg. F.)

Air Air

Water Water Water

10 or less Over 10

10 or less 10 – 20 Over 20

½ 1

1/10 ½ 1

PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES 2.1.1 Adjustments

Adjust all air handling systems to provide the required design air quantity to, or through, each component. Conduct adjusting and balancing of systems during periods of the year approximating maximum seasonal operation. Doors shall be closed and fume hood sashes full open, and all other ancillary system in simultaneous operation.

2.1.2 Equalizers

Adjust equalizing devices to provide uniform velocity across the inlets (duct side for supply) of terminals, prior to measuring flow rates.

2.1.3 Balanced

Use flow adjusting (volume control) devices to balance air quantities only; i.e., proportion flow between various terminals comprising system, and only to the extent that their adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound, i.e., in excess of specified limits.


4 of 9

2.1.3.1 Balancing between Runs (sub mains, branch mains and branches)

Use flow regulating devices at, or, in, the divided - flow fitting. Minimize restriction imposed by flow regulating devices in or at terminals.

2.1.3.2 Final Measurements of Air Quantity

Make final measurements of air quantity, after the air terminals have been adjusted to provide the optimum air patterns of diffusion.

2.1.4 Fan Adjustment

Total air system quantities, generally, shall be varied by adjustment of fan speed, or axial-flow fan wheel blade pitch. For systems with direct-connected fans (without adjustable pitch blades), damper restrictions of system's total flow may be used, only if system pressure is less than 13 mm w.g. and sound level criteria is met.

2.1.5 Air Measurement 2.1.5.1 Pivot Tube

Except as specifically indicated herein, make pitot tube traverses of each duct to measure air flow therein. Pitot tubes, associated instruments, traverses, and techniques shall conform to the ASHRAE Handbook Fundamentals.

2.1.5.2 Pitot Tube Traverse Except for ducts serving modular office areas with movable partitions, which are subject to change, Pitot-tube traverse may be omitted if the duct serves only a single room or space and its design volume is less than 2000 cfm. In lieu of Pitot-tube traverse, determine air flow in the duct by totalling volume of individual terminals served, measured as described herein.

2.1.5.3 Measurements of Air Quantity Where duct's design velocity and air quantity are both less than 1000 (fpm/cfm), air quantity may be determined by measurements at terminals served.

2.1.5.4 Test Holes Test holes shall be in a straight duct, as far as possible downstream from elbows, bends, take-offs, and other turbulence generating devices, to optimize reliability of flow measurements.

2.1.5.5 Air Terminal Balancing

Measurement of flow rates by means of velocity meters applied to individual terminals, with or without cones or other adapters, shall be used only for balancing. Measurement of air quantities at each type of air terminal (inlet and outlet) shall be determined by the method approved for balancing agenda. Conduct laboratory tests to prove accuracy of methodology when so directed by the Engineer. Perform such tests in conformance with applicable ASHRAE or ASME codes.

2.1.5.6 Air Motion and Distribution

As indicated. The Contractor, in addition to air motion measurements, shall make smoke tests wherever requested by the Engineer, to demonstrate the air distribution from air terminals.


5 of 9

2.2 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURES 2.2.1 Adjustment Adjust chilled water systems to provide required quantity to, or through each component. 2.2.2 Metering Measure water quantities and pressure with calibrated meters. 2.2.2.1 Water Measurements and Balancing

Use venturi tubes, orifices, or other metering fittings and pressure gages. Adjust systems to provide the approved pressure drops through the heat transfer equipment prior to the capacity testing. Where flow metering fittings are not installed, determine flow balance by measuring temperature differential across the heat transfer equipment. Perform measurement of temperature differential with the air system, adjusted as described herein, in operation.

2.2.3 Automatic Controls

Position automatic control valves for full flow through the heat transfer equipment of the system during tests.

2.2.4 Flow

Flow through by-pass circuits at three-way valves shall be adjusted to balance that through the supply circuit.

2.2.5 Distribution

Adjust distribution by means of balancing devices (cocks, valves, and fittings) and automatic flow control valves. Do not use service valves for adjustment. Where automatic flow control valves are utilized in lieu of venture tubes, record only pressure drop across the valve if said pressure drop is within the pressure drop rating on the valve tag.

2.2.6 Special Procedures

Where available, pump capacity (as designed) is less than total flow requirements of individual heat transfer units of system served, full flow may be simulated by the temporary restriction of flow to portions of the system. In such a case, delineate specific procedures in the agenda.

2.3 CERTIFIED REPORTS 2.3.1 Submittal

Submit three copies of the reports described herein, covering air and water system performance, and air motion (fpm), to the Engineer prior to final tests and inspection.

2.3.2 Instrument Records Include types, serial numbers, and dates of calibration of all instruments. 2.3.3 Reports

Reports shall identify conspicuously items not conforming to contract requirements, or obvious mal-operation and design deficiencies.


6 of 9

2.3.4 Certification

The reports shall be certified by an independent Registered Professional Engineer who is versed in the field of air and water balancing and who is not affiliated with any firm involved in the design or construction phases of the project. Certification shall include checking or adherence to agenda of calculations, procedures, and evaluation of final summaries.

2.4 AIR SYSTEM DATA 2.4.1 Report The certified report shall include for each air-handling system the data listed below:

a. Equipment (fan or factory fabricated station unit): (1) Installation Data: (i) Manufacturer and Model (ii) Size (iii) Arrangement, Discharge, and Class

(iv) Motor H.P., Voltage, Phase, Cycles, and Full Load Amps. (v) Location and Local Identification Data

(2) Design Data: Data listed in schedules on drawings and specifications. (3) Fan Recorded (Test) Data (i) C.F.M. (ii) Static Pressure (iii) R.P.M. (iv) Motor Operating Amps. (v) Motor Operating B.H.P. b. Duct Systems:

(1) Duct Air Quantities (Maximum and Minimum) - Main, Submains, Branches, Outdoor (Outside) Air, Total-Air, and Exhaust

(i) Duct size(s) (ii) Number of Pitot-tube (Pressure) Measurements

(iii) Sum of Velocity Measurement, excluding pressure measurements (iv) Average Velocity (v) Recorded (Test) C.F.M. (vi) Design C.F.M.

(2) Individual Air Terminals:

(i) Terminal Identification (Supply or Exhaust, \Location and Number Designation)

(ii) Type Size, Manufacturer, and Catalog Identification (iii) Design and Recorded Quantities - C.F.M. (iv) Deflector Vane or Diffusion Cone Settings

(v) Applicable Factor for Application, Velocity, Area, etc. (vi) Design and Recorded Velocities - F.P.M. (State "core" "inlet," etc., as

applicable)


7 of 9

2.5 WATER SYSTEM DATA 2.5.1 Report Include data listed below: a. Pumps: (1) Installation Data: (i) Manufacturer and Model (ii) Size (iii) Type Drive (iv) Motor H.P., Voltage, Phase, and Full Load Amps. (2) Design Data: (i) G.P.M. (ii) Head (iii) R.P.M. (iv) B.H.P. and Amps. (3) Recorded Data: (i) Discharge Pressures (Full-Flow and No-Flow) (ii) Suction Pressures (Full-Flow and No-Flow) (iii) Operating Head

(iv) Operating G.P.M. (from pump curves if metering is not provided) (v) No-load Amps. (Where possible) (vi) Full-Flow Amps (vii) No-Flow Amps b. Air Handling and Cooling Equipment: (1) Design Data: (i) Load in Btu per hr (ii) G.P.M. (iii) Entering and Leaving Water Temperature (iv) Entering and Leaving Air Conditions (D.B. and W.B) (v) C.F.M. (vi) Water Pressure Drop (2) Recorded Data:

(i) Type of Equipment and Identification (location or number designation) (ii) Entering and Leaving Air Conditions (D.B. and W.B.)

(iii) Entering and Leaving Water Temperatures (iv) G.P.M. (if metered) (v) Temperature Rise or Drop c. Water Chilling Units (1) Installation Data: (i) Manufacturer and Model

(ii) Motor H.P., Voltage, Cycles, Phase, and Full Load Amps. (iii) Part Load Amperes (iv) G.P.M. (v) Water Pressure Drop


8 of 9

(vi) Entering and Leaving Water Temperature (2) Recorded Data (i) G.P.M. (ii) Water Pressure Drop (iii) Entering and Leaving Water Temperature (iv) Amperes 2.6 FINAL TESTS, INSPECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 2.6.1 Capacity and Performance Tests

Make tests to demonstrate that capacities and general performance of air and water systems comply with contract requirements.

2.6.1.1 Final Inspection

At the time of final inspection, the Contractor shall recheck, in the presence of the Engineer, random selections of data, water and air quantities and air motion recorded in the certified report.

2.6.1.2 Points and Areas for Recheck As selected by the Engineer. 2.6.1.3 Measurement and Test Procedures As approved for work forming basis of certified report. 2.6.1.4 Selections for Recheck (specific plus random)

In general, selections for recheck will not exceed 25 percent of the total number tabulated in the report, except that special air systems may require a complete recheck for safety reasons.

2.6.2 Retests

If random tests elicit a measured flow deviation of ten percent or more from that recorded in the certified report listings, at ten percent or more of the rechecked selections, the report shall be automatically rejected. In the event the report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new data recorded, new certified reports submitted, and new inspection tests made.

2.6.3 Marking of Settings

Following final acceptance of certified reports by the Engineer, the settings of all valves, volume, dampers, and other adjustment devices shall be permanently marked by the Contractor, so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Do not mark devices until after final acceptance.


9 of 9


Payment shall be made upon acceptance by the engineer after conducting the testing and balancing showing that the equipment conforms and satisfies the requirement of the specifications. Complete testing and balancing report signed by the contractor and the Engineer, (6 – sets) shall be submitted to the Engineer.


******